Download Print this page

Rohde & Schwarz ZVRE Operating Manual

Rohde & Schwarz ZVRE Operating Manual

Vector network analyzer

Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Operating Manual

VECTOR NETWORK

ANALYZER

ZVR / ZVRE / ZVRL

1127.8551.61/.62

1127.8551.51/.52

1127.8551.41

ZVC / ZVCE

1127.8600.60/.61/.62

1127.8600.50/.51/.52

ZVM

1127.8500.60

ZVK

1127.8651.60

Volume 1

Operating Manual consists of 2 volumes

Printed in the Federal

Republic of Germany

1127.8700.12-03-

Test and Measurement

Division

1

Table of Contents

Advertisement

Chapters

Table of Contents

Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the ZVRE and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Summary of Contents for Rohde & Schwarz ZVRE

Page 1 Test and Measurement Division Operating Manual VECTOR NETWORK ANALYZER ZVR / ZVRE / ZVRL 1127.8551.61/.62 1127.8551.51/.52 1127.8551.41 ZVC / ZVCE 1127.8600.60/.61/.62 1127.8600.50/.51/.52 1127.8500.60 1127.8651.60 Volume 1 Operating Manual consists of 2 volumes Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany 1127.8700.12-03-...
Page 3 Tabbed Divider Overview Volume 1 Volume 2 Contents Contents Index Index Data Sheet Supplements Safety Instructions Safety Instructions Certificate of Quality Certificate of Quality EC-Certificate of Conformity EC-Certificate of Conformity Support Center Address Support Center Address List of R&S Representatives List of R&S Representatives Tabbed Divider Tabbed Divider...
Page 5 Test and Measurement Division Release Notes Firmware Version 3.52 for ZVR / ZVRE / ZVRL / ZVC / ZVCE/ZVM/ZVK 1112.7990.39 Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany 1112.8050.52-17-...
Page 7: Table Of Contents
Firmware Version 3.52 Contents General Information .......................... 1 Manual for ZVR Family........................1 Update Procedure ......................... 1 Initial Steps............................ 1 Documentation of Firmware Modifications ..................1 1 Firmware Update ........................... 2 System Requirements ........................2 Preparations for Update ........................ 2 Contents of Firmware Update Kit ....................
Page 9: General Information
Firmware Version 3.52 General Information Manual for ZVR Family The analyzers of the ZVR family are supplied with the following manual: "Operating Manual – Vector Network Analyzer" ZVR/E/L, ZVC/E, ZVM, ZVK Order No. 1127.8700.xx-03- where xx (German) (English) (French) (English, US letter format) Update Procedure The update instructions given in section 1 of this release note are to the latest state;...
Page 10: Firmware Update
Firmware Version 3.52 1 Firmware Update System Requirements None Preparations for Update No preparations are required. Contents of Firmware Update Kit The update kit comprises the following: • Five 3.5"/1.44 Mbyte disks labelled as follows: Disk 1 : „V3.52 DISK 1“ Disk 2 : „V3.52 DISK 2“...
Page 11 Firmware Version 3.52 ½ Execute disk1.exe, e.g. by using the following command sequence for Windows95/NT: <CTRL><ESC> - RUN – C:\ ZVRTEMP \DISK1 - <ENTER> (English version) or <CTRL><ESC> - AUSFÜHREN – C:\ ZVRTEMP \DISK1 - <ENTER> (German version). The files are extracted. ½...
Page 12 Firmware Version 3.52 If you have received a firmware update kit on a disk ... You can load the firmware directly from the disk to your network analyzer. ½ Insert the disk DISK 1 into the drive. Press the SETUP key and change to the side menu by pressing ⇒ key. ½...
Page 13: New Features, Improvements And Modifications
Firmware Version 3.52 2 New Features, Improvements and Modifications New Features • Support of waveguide calibration: For this purpose, two new softkeys were added to the menu CAL → CAL KITS → right side menu: WAVEGUIDE (position 6) and CUTOFF FREQUENCY (position 7) •...
Page 14: Improvements
Firmware Version 3.52 Improvements • When reading and writing system error correction data and level correction data in the REAL64 format, an error message is output. Affected IEC/IEEE bus commands: SENSe[1..4]:CORRection:DATA SENSe[1..4]:CORRection:POWer:DATA SOURce[1..4]:POWer:CORRection:DATA • If a waveguide calibration (WAVEGUIDE = ON) is performed via IEC/IEEE bus with a CUTOFF FREQUENCY that is higher than the START FREQUENCY, an error message is now output because this action is not permitted.
Page 15: Bug Fixes
Firmware Version 3.52 3 Bug Fixes • In the ACTIVE xx STANDARDS table, the entries for the OPEN standards are again available when a calibration is performed. • System error correction data sets generated with a version <3.50 can now be recalled again (RECALL).
Page 16: Extensions To Operating Manual
Firmware Version 3.52 4 Extensions to Operating Manual Characteristics of Calibration Standards (Re section 2.15.1.3) The MODIFY CAL KIT softkey opens a menu for the management of calibration kits for the individual connector families. Exact knowledge of the calibration standards is a prerequisite for a accurate system-error calibration. More precisely, the calibration is based on the knowledge of those S-parameters of the standards which are assumed to be known for the applied calibration method.
Page 17 Firmware Version 3.52 CAL CAL - CAL KITS submenu: CAL KITS USER CAL KITS Ω STANDARDS ACTIVE N 50 CONNECTOR STANDARD TYPE TYPE THROUGH (MM) ZV-Z21 ACTIVATE THROUGH (FF) ZV-Z21 ZV-Z21 THROUGH (MF) LINE 1 (MM) MODIFY STANDARDS LINE 1 (FF) LINE 1 (MF) ZV-Z26 VIEW...
Page 18 The following types of standards are provided for the various types of network analyzers. Due to the restricted calibration facilities of the ZVRE, ZVCE and ZVRL compared to the ZVR, ZVC, ZVK and ZVM, a reduced set of standards is required only.
Page 19 Firmware Version 3.52 CAL CAL - MODIFY CAL KIT - SELECT KIT submenu: The CONNECTOR TYPE softkey calls a menu for selecting the CAL KITS CONNECTOR TYPE connector family shown in the ACTIVE XX STANDARDS table. CONNECTOR Ν 50 Ω The type and order of the connectors shown in this menu are TYPE different for the different models of the ZVx family.
Page 20 Firmware Version 3.52 The SEXLESS USR CONN 1 softkey displays the table ACTIVE USER CONN 1 SEXLESS USR CONN 1 STANDARDS. The connector family SEXLESS USR CONN 1 which can be user- defined is not polarized (similar to PC 7) and particularly suited for non-coaxial cable systems such as microstrip.
Page 21 Firmware Version 3.52 Modifying the standards The MODIFY STANDARDS softkey calls the MODIFY XX YY STANDARDS table. In the four quadrants of this table, the parameters of the four individual standards of a single type are displayed. The type is selected in the ACTIVE XX STANDARDS table.
Page 22 Firmware Version 3.52 An asterisk (*) as the last character of the kit name indicates that the preset values or the values installed from floppy of one or several parameters of the corresponding individual standard were changed. If an attempt is made to enter a calibration kit name which is already present twice (e.g.
Page 23 Firmware Version 3.52 C0... C3 – polynomial coefficients for parasitic capacitance For OPEN, as well as for REFLECT and SYMMETRIC NETWORK with APPROX = OPEN selected, the parasitic capacitance at the open end of the line can be described by a third-order frequency polynomial. C0 denotes the constant part, C1 to C3 the polynomial coefficients of the corresponding powers of the frequency.
Page 24 Firmware Version 3.52 The CREATE INST FILE softkey creates an installation file for a calibration kit. This CREATE INST FILE function is useful, e.g., if an updated installation file for the entire calibration kit is needed after exchange of an individual calibration standard, or if calibration kit data entered via MODIFY STANDARDS are to be transferred to other instruments.
Page 25 Firmware Version 3.52 The INSTALL NEW KIT softkey allows the user to install calibration kits from a floppy INSTALL NEW KIT disk or another storage medium. If a floppy containing a single calibration kit file (this applies to all floppies provided with the calibration kits from Rohde &...
Page 26 Firmware Version 3.52 The connector families SEXLESS USR CONN 1 and USR CONN 2 can also be WAVEGUIDE configured for waveguide calibration by means of the WAVEGUIDE softkey. If this softkey is activated, the instrument takes into account the nonlinear relationship between the phase of the S-parameters and the frequency, which prevails in waveguides.
Page 27 Firmware Version 3.52 The USER CONN NAME softkey activates the entry of a name comprising up to 11 USER CONN NAME characters for the connector families SEXLESS USR CONN 1 and USR CONN 2. The name refers to the family selected in the CONNECTOR TYPE menu. In the title of the tables ACTIVE XX STANDARDS, MODIFY XX YY STANDARDS and ACTIVE XX YY, it replaces the character string XX.
Page 28: New Ieee-Bus Commands
Firmware Version 3.52 5 New IEEE-Bus Commands CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem (Re section 3.6.3.5) The CALCulate:MARKer subsystem controls the marker functions. COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT CALCulate<1..4> :MARKer<1...8> [:STATe] <Boolean> :AOFF no query :MODE CONTinuous | DISCrete :COUPled [:STATe] <Boolean> <numeric_value> HZ | S | DBM :MODE ABS | REL query only...
Page 29 Firmware Version 3.52 COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT :RPOSition [:CARTesian] <numeric_value>,<numeric_value> HZ | S | DBM,DB POLar <numeric_value>,<numeric_value>, HZ | S | DBM,DB, <numeric_value> :PTPeak :STATe <Boolean> query only :RESult? [ALL] no query :CENTer no query :STARt no query :STOP no query :REFerence CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:EDELay This command switches on or off the display of the electrical or the mechanical length or the phase...
Page 30 Firmware Version 3.52 SENSe:CORRection Subsystem (Re section 3.6.14.3) The SENSe:CORRection subsystem controls the system error correction and the recording of the individual correction values. COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT :CORRection [:STATe] <Boolean> :DATA <string>,<block> | <numeric_value>... :DATE? query only :INTerpolate [:STATe] <Boolean>...
Page 31 Firmware Version 3.52 COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT :USER<1|2> MMTHrough | MFTHrough | FFTHrough | MMLINE1 | MFLINE1 | FFLINE1 | MMLINE2 | MFLINE2 | FFLINE2 | MMATten | MFATten | FFATten | MMSNetwork | MFSNetwork | FFSNetwork | MOPen | FOPen | MSHort | FSHort | OSHort | FOSHort | MOSHort | MREFlect | FREFlect | MMTCh | FMTCh |...
Page 32 Firmware Version 3.52 [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:CKIT:USER<1|2>:WGUIde[:STATe] This command switches on or off waveguide calibration for the respective calibration kit. The suffix of SENSe has no meaning. [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:CKIT:USER<1|2>:WGUide[:STATe] ON | OFF Syntax: "CORR:CKIT:USER:WGU ON" Example: *RST value: Features: SCPI: device-specific [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:CKIT:USER<1|2>:CFRequency This command sets the cutoff frequency for the USER calibration kit. Syntax: [SENSe[1...4]:]CORREction:CKIT:USER<1|2>: CFRequency <numeric_value>...
Page 33 Firmware Version 3.52 The table below shows the correction terms available for the calibration methods: Calibration Method Available Correction Terms Trans Norm Forward SCORR6 Trans Norm Reverse SCORR12 Trans Norm both Directions SCORR6, SCORR12 Refl Norm P1 SCORR3 Refl Norm P2 SCORR9 Refl Norm both Ports SCORR3, SCORR9...
Page 34 Firmware Version 3.52 SOURce Subsystem (Re section 3.6.15) COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT SOURce<1...4> :POWer [:LEVel] [:IMMediate] [:AMPLitude] <numeric_value> :CAMPlitude :A<1|2> <numeric_value> :ESRC<1|2> <numeric_value> :SLOPe <numeric_value> DB/GHZ :EXTernal<1|2> [:AMPLitude] <numeric_value> :SLOPe <numeric_value> DB/GHZ :ALC [:STATe] <Boolean> :NLINear :COMP :RANGe :UPPer <numeric_value> :LOWer <numeric_value>...
Page 35 Firmware Version 3.52 COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT :FREQuency [:CW] <numeric_value> :FIXED <numeric_value> :CONVersion :ARBitrary :IFRequency <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, CW | FIXed | SWEep :EFRequency<1|2> <Boolean>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, CW | FIXed | SWEep :NLINear :COMP INT | ESRC1 | ESRC2 :SOI IESRC1 | IESRC2 | ESRC12 :OFFSet...
Page 36: Special Features
Firmware Version 3.52 6 Special Features The format of the system error calibration (SFK) files and the calibration kit (CalKit files was changed for version 3.50. The files from older firmware versions are therefore converted to the new data format. The change concerns files with the extension "CAC", "CA1" to "CA4", "CK", "CKD" and "DAT".
Page 37 Contents Contents 1 Preparation for Use ........................1.1 Introduction..........................1.1 Legend for Front and Rear View ..................1.1 1.2.1 Front View ZVR, ZVK and ZVM..................1.1 1.2.1.1 Front View ZVR ....................1.1 1.2.1.2 Front View ZVK, ZVM ..................1.13 1.2.2 Rear View ZVR, ZVK and ZVM ................... 1.15 Start-Up..........................
Page 38 Contents 2 Manual Operation ........................2.1 Introduction: Measurement Examples and Processing of Measured Values ....2.1 2.1.1 Transmission Measurements – Measurement of Gain and Loss........2.2 2.1.1.1 Measurement Task................... 2.2 2.1.1.2 Connection of the DUT ..................2.2 2.1.1.3 Preset ....................... 2.2 2.1.1.4 Setting the Analyzer..................
Page 39 Contents 2.3.2.6 Quad Channel Quad Split................2.63 2.3.2.7 Full Screen – Expand Mode ................2.63 2.3.3 Diagrams ........................2.64 2.3.3.1 Cartesian Diagrams..................2.64 2.3.3.2 Polar Diagrams....................2.68 2.3.3.3 Smith Charts....................2.71 2.3.3.4 Inverted Smith Charts..................2.72 2.3.3.5 Charter Diagrams ................... 2.72 2.3.4 Display Windows ......................
Page 40 Contents 2.4.2.1.1 IEC Bus Address Selection ............2.142 2.4.2.1.2 User Port Configuration .............. 2.143 2.4.2.1.3 Serial Interface Configuration ............. 2.144 2.4.2.1.4 Setting Date and Time..............2.147 2.4.2.1.5 Connecting the External Monitor ..........2.147 2.4.2.1.6 Indication of the Automatic System Error Calibration ....2.148 2.4.2.2 External Reference Oscillator...............
Page 41 Contents 2.10.1.2 Defining the grid ................. 2.193 2.10.1.3 Defining the Number of Points............ 2.199 2.10.1.4 Setting the Trigger Mode ............2.200 2.10.1.5 Automatic or Manual Setting of the Sweep Time ....... 2.203 2.10.1.6 Coupling of Display Channels............. 2.204 2.10.1.7 Miscellaneous Settings ............... 2.205 2.10.2Starting a New Sweep –...
Page 42 2.318 b)AutoKal Fundamental Calibration..........2.320 2.15.1.1.4 Automatic Two-port Transfer Calibration........2.320 2.15.1.1.5 Full One-port Calibr. (ZVR, ZVRE; ZVC, ZVCE, ZVK, ZVM)..2.324 2.15.1.1.6 Full One-port Calibration (ZVRL)..........2.327 2.15.1.1.7 Unidir. Two-port Calibr. (ZVR, ZVRE, ZVC,ZVCE, ZVK, ZVM) .. 2.328 2.15.1.1.8 Unidirectional Two-port Calibration (ZVRL)........
Page 43 Figures Figures Fig. 1-1 Front view ZVR ..................1.2; 1.4; 1.6; 1.8; 1.10 Fig. 1-1 Front view ZVK, ZVM......................1.12 Fig. 1-2 Rear View ......................1.14, 1.16; 1.18 Fig. 2-1 Measurement display screen with an autoscaled trace............2.5 Fig. 2-2 Measurement display screen after manual scaling ..............2.7 Fig.
Page 44 Figures Fig. 2-32 Selecting partial data sets to be recalled ................2.180 Fig. 2-33 Editing the segment list......................2.194 Fig. 2-34 Selection of limit lines ......................2.234 Fig. 2-35 Defining a limit line in a Cartesian diagram ................. 2.239 Fig. 2-36 Defining the Cartesian Segmentation of the y Axis ............. 2.280 Fig.
Page 45 Tables Tables Table 1-1 Factory settings for DEVICE 1 and 2 in the HARDCOPY-DEVICE SETTINGS menu..1.29 Table 2-1 Overview of the most important PRESET settings ..............2.1 Table 2-2 Relationship between file extensions and contents of partial data sets ......2.166 Table 2-3 PRESET settings .......................
Page 47 A list of softkeys and equivalent remote control commands or command sequences is given in section 3.9. Annex C contains a list of all remote control commands. APPLY CAL (TOSM)..........2.313, 3.93 APPLY CAL (TOSM, ZVRE) ......2.319, 3.93 APPLY CAL (TRANS AND REFL NORM, ZVR) = MKR (key) ............... 2.229 ................2.337, 3.93 APPLY CAL (TRANS AND REFL NORM, ZVRL) ................2.340, 3.93...
Page 48 ......2.126, 3.106, 3.107, 3.117, 3.118, 3.122 full one-port ............2.327 Compression point ............. 2.126 full two-port............2.305 measurement ............2.127 full two-port (ZVRE)..........2.317 CONFIG (key) ............2.167 fundamental (ZVRL) ..........2.332 CONFIG DISPLAY ............. 2.287 interpolation............2.342 Configuration normalization (ZVR)..........
Page 49 Index DATA SET LIST (RECALL) ........2.179 Diagram DATA SET LIST / CONTENTS (RECALL) (selection table) Cartesian .............2.64, 2.278 ................... 2.179 Charter............2.72, 2.284 DATA SET LIST / CONTENTS (SAVE) (selection table) expand ..............2.286 ................... 2.170 inverted Smith ............2.284 DATA TO MEMORY ........
Page 50 EXT SRC CONFIG (mixer measurement)....2.120 FULL TWO PORT ............2.305 EXT SRC1 (compression point) ....... 2.131, 3.122 FULL TWO PORT (ZVRE) ......... 2.317 EXT SRC1 EXT SRC2 (SOI) ......2.137, 3.122 Fuse................1.21 EXT SRC1 EXT SRC2 (TOI) ......2.137, 3.122 EXT SRC2 (compression point) .......
Page 51 ..............2.155 INVERTED SMITH..........2.284, 3.46 format ..............2.163 ISOLATION YES/NO (TOSM)........2.313 output device ............2.162 ISOLATION YES/NO (TOSM, ZVRE) ......2.319 position..............2.159 ITEMS TO RECALL (selection table) ......2.181 screen ..............2.158 ITEMS TO SAVE (selection table)......2.172 HARDCOPY DEVICE ........
Page 52 MATCH PORT 1 (ONE PATH, ZVRL) ....2.332, 3.92 LINE SECTIONS (selection table) ......2.239 MATCH PORT 1 (TOSM)........2.313, 3.92 Line style MATCH PORT 1 (TOSM, ZVRE) .......2.319, 3.92 selection of ............2.164 MATCH PORT 2 ......2.306, 2.308, 2.310, 3.92 LINE STYLE CHn ............2.164 MATCH PORT 2 (FULL ONE PORT) ....2.326, 3.92...
Page 53 OPEN PORT 1 (REFL NORM, ZVRL) ....2.339, 3.92 Plotter OPEN PORT 1 (TOSM)........2.313, 3.92 connection ............. 1.28 OPEN PORT 1 (TOSM, ZVRE) ......2.318, 3.92 POINTS/DEC ...........2.200, 3.113 OPEN PORT 1 (TRANS AND REFL NORM, ZVR) Polar diagram............... 2.68 ................
Page 54 (ZVC, ZVCE)..........5.58 RESET OFFSETS............2.372 test sequence (ZVC, ZVCE) ........5.53 RESPONSE (key group) ..........2.247 test sequence (ZVR, ZVRE, ZVRL) ......5.2 RESTART (key) ............2.206 test set (ZVC, ZVCE)..........5.63 RESTORE INSTD KITS ..........2.351 test set (ZVR, ZVRE, ZVRL)........5.14 RESUME CAL............
Page 55 SHORT PORT 1 (ONE PATH, ZVR) ....2.330, 3.92 softkey area............2.59 SHORT PORT 1 (ONE PATH, ZVRL) ....2.332, 3.92 subdivision .............2.60 SHORT PORT 1 (TOSM, ZVRE)......2.319, 3.92 SEARCH ..........2.223, 2.225, 3.32 SHORT PORT 2..........2.313, 3.92 SEARCH ← NEXT..........2.224, 3.32 SHORT PORT 2 (FULL ONE PORT) ....2.325, 3.92...
Page 56 START NEW CAL ............2.300 Test Sequence START NEW POWER CAL ........3.116 ZVC, ZVCE ............5.53 START POWER CAL ..........2.355 ZVR, ZVRE, ZVRL ........... 5.2 Start value ..............2.189 Testing the Rated Specifications ........5.1 Start-Up ................1.20 Thick Ethernet.............. 1.44 Status registers............
Page 57 Index TOM-X............... 2.314, 3.93 Windows NT..............1.23 TOSM ..............2.312, 3.93 administrator ............1.23 TOSM (ZVRE) ........... 2.318, 3.93 login ............... 1.23 TOUCHSTONE ..........2.173, 3.53 password ............... 1.23 Trace ................2.58 TRACE (key) .............. 2.292 TRACE MATH function..........2.176 X DB COMP POINT (compression point) ..2.129, 3.107 Tracking..............
Page 59 ZVRE and ZVR: Accuracy of transmission measurements page 11 Footnote 1) ..............< 0.2 dB or <1° for 300 kHz to 100 MHz (ZVRE) ..................< 0.2 dB or <1° for 300 kHz to 20 MHz (ZVR) Linearity above 40 kHz (referred to –10 dBm) page 13 –15 dBm to –25 dBm (ZVR/E/L)....................
Page 60 Increased Output Power for Port 1 option page 16 Max. nominal output power ZVCE, ZVC with SWR bridges PORT1 OUTPUT a1 20 kHz to 2 GHz +6 dBm +13 dBm 2 GHz to 6 GHz +4 dBm +11 dBm 6 GHz to 8 GHz +1 dBm +11 dBm ZVCE, ZVC with couplers...
Page 61 Data sheet PD 757.5543.22 (ZVM, ZVK) number 11/00 Dynamic range (without system error correction, page 8 without optional attenuator) at IF bandwidth of 10 Hz 10 kHz 10 Hz 10 kHz up to 150 MHz ..............> 75 dB > 45 dB >...
Page 63 Important Hints before Operation: For all instruments: • The directory C:\R_S\INSTR and its subdirectories are reserved for system software. Never modify this directory in any way, otherwise the functioning of the instrument will be impaired. • Aborting a hardcopy is not possible when printout is in progress. Print jobs in the queue can be deleted before printout has been started by pressing the HARDCOPY START key until the message "Hardcopy in progress.
Page 64 Patent Information This product contains technology licensed by Marconi Instruments LTD. under US patents 4609881 and 4870384 and under corresponding patents in Germany and elsewhere. Please note the safety instructions on the next sheet ! 1043.0009.50...
Page 65 Before putting the product into operation for the first time, make sure to read the following S a f e t y I n s t r u c t i o n s Rohde & Schwarz makes every effort to keep the safety standard of its products up to date and to offer its customers the highest possible degree of safety.
Page 66 Safety Instructions Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by dangerous situations. Therefore, carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions before putting the product into operation. It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety instructions on personal safety that appear in other parts of the documentation.
Page 67 Safety Instructions 4. If products/components are mechanically 10. Intentionally breaking the protective earth and/or thermically processed in a manner connection either in the feed line or in the that goes beyond their intended use, product itself is not permitted. Doing so can hazardous substances (heavy-metal dust result in the danger of an electric shock such as lead, beryllium, nickel) may be...
Page 68 Safety Instructions 19. If a product is to be permanently installed, matching Rohde & Schwarz type (see the connection between the PE terminal on spare parts list). Batteries and storage site and the product's PE conductor must batteries are hazardous waste. Dispose of be made first before any other connection them only in specially marked containers.
Page 69 Por favor lea imprescindiblemente antes de la primera puesta en funcionamiento las siguientes informaciones de seguridad Informaciones de seguridad Es el principio de Rohde & Schwarz de tener a sus productos siempre al día con los estandards de seguridad y de ofrecer a sus clientes el máximo grado de seguridad. Nuestros productos y todos los equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados según las normas de seguridad vigentes.
Page 70 Informaciones de seguridad Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para tratar de evitar daños y peligros de toda clase. Es necesario de que se lean las siguientes informaciones de seguridad concienzudamente y se tengan en cuenta debidamente antes de la puesta en funcionamiento del producto. También deberán ser tenidas en cuenta las informaciones para la protección de personas que encontrarán en otro capítulo de esta documentación y que también son obligatorias de seguir.
Page 71 Informaciones de seguridad seguridad (control a primera vista, control de peligro a causa de la radiación conductor protector, medición de resistencia electromagnética. El empresario está de aislamiento, medición de medición de la comprometido a valorar y señalar areas de corriente conductora, control trabajo en las que se corra un riesgo de...
Page 72 Informaciones de seguridad 12. No utilice nunca el producto si está dañado el 20. En caso de que los productos que son cable eléctrico. Asegure a través de las instalados fijamente en un lugar sean sin medidas de protección y de instalación protector implementado, autointerruptor o adecuadas de que el cable de eléctrico no similares objetos de protección, deberá...
Page 73 Informaciones de seguridad 27. Baterías y acumuladores no deben de ser 31. Las asas instaladas en los productos sirven expuestos a temperaturas altas o al fuego. solamente de ayuda para el manejo que Guardar baterías y acumuladores fuera del solamente está previsto para personas. Por alcance de los niños.
Page 74 Vector Network Analyzer ZVCE 1127.8600.50/.51/.52 1127.8651.60 1127.8500.60 1127.8551.61/.62 ZVRE 1127.8551.51/.52/.55 ZVRL 1127.8551.41 complies with the provisions of the Directive of the Council of the European Union on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electrical equipment for use within defined voltage limits...
Page 75 EC Certificate of Conformity Certificate No.: 2000-05, page 2 This is to certify that: Equipment type Stock No. Designation ZVK-B21 1128.1409.11 Attenuator for Generator Port 1 ZVK-B22 1128.1409.21 Attenuator for Generator Port 2 ZVK-B23 1128.1409.12 Attenuator for Receiver Port 1 ZVK-B24 1128.1409.22 Attenuator for Receiver Port 2...
Page 76: Preparation For Use
Front View Preparation for Use Introduction The following chapter describes the position of the controls and sockets of a network analyzer of the ZVR family via the views of the front and rear panels. It shows step by step how the instrument is started and set up.
Page 77: Fig. 1-1 Front View Zvr
Front View Ã Ã “ Ã B Ã $ Ã Ã “ Ã Ã Ã # “ Ã H “ “ Ã B Ã B Ã Ã Ã Ã Ã q Ã q Ã Ã Ã $ Ã Ã...
Page 78 Front View Designation, frequency range and Order No. Of device: e. g. 9 kHz ... 4 GHz 1127.8551.61 Softkeys See chapter 2, sections 2.3.1.2 and 2.3.4 USER Writing keyboard macros See chapter 2, USER section 2.8 STIMULUS Setting the sweep limits See chapter 2, STIMULUS section 2.9...
Page 79 Front View Ã Ã “ Ã B Ã $ Ã Ã “ Ã Ã Ã # “ Ã H “ “ Ã B Ã B Ã Ã Ã Ã Ã q Ã q Ã Ã Ã $ Ã Ã...
Page 80 Front View RESPONSE Configuration of result display See chapter 2, RESPONSE sections 2.2 MEAS FORMAT SCALE MEAS Select measurement unit and 2.14 FORMAT Format measurement unit DIAGRAM DIS PLAY TRACE SCALE Select scale of measurement diagram DIAGRAM Select the result diagram DISPLAY Configure the display TRACE...
Page 81 Front View Ã Ã “ Ã B Ã $ Ã Ã “ Ã Ã Ã # “ Ã H “ “ Ã B Ã B Ã Ã Ã Ã Ã q Ã q Ã Ã Ã $ Ã Ã...
Page 82 Front View DATA VARIATION Keys for varying data and cursor movement See chapter 2, D A T A V A R I A T I O N section 2.3.6, HOLD Disable control elements or overall 2.3.7, 2.3.8 instrument control. STEP HOLD LED signals the hold condition.
Page 83 Front View Ã A Ã “ Ã B Ã $ Ã Ã “ Ã Ã Ã # “ Ã H “ “ Ã B Ã B Ã Ã Ã Ã Ã q Ã q Ã Ã Ã $ Ã Ã...
Page 84 Front View MARKER Selecting and setting markers See chapter 2, MARKER sections 2.2 MARKER SEARC H MARKER Select and set main markers and 2.11 SEARCH Marker search functions DE LTA = MKR DELTA Select and set the delta markers = MKR Take over the active marker position for sweep setting or scaling Menu change keys...
Page 85 Front View Ã A Ã “ Ã B Ã $ Ã Ã “ Ã Ã Ã # “ Ã H “ “ Ã B Ã B Ã Ã Ã Ã Ã q Ã q Ã Ã Ã $ Ã Ã...
Page 86 Front View ON/STANDBY Switch See chapter 1, ST BY LED STBY Indicates that the instrument is in the section 1.3.5 standby mode Warning: In the standby mode the instrument is connected to the AC supply. LED ON Indicates that the instrument is powered.
Page 87 Front View Ã “ Ã Ã “ Ã Ã Ã “ Ã “ “ Ã B Ã Ã Ã Ã Ã Ã q Ã Ã Ã Ã Ã Ã Fig. 1-1 Front view ZVK, ZVM 1043.0009.50 1.12...
Page 88: Front View Zvk, Zvm
Front View 1.2.1.2 Front View ZVK, ZVM The control elements correspond to those of ZVR with the exception of the connectors. For this reason, only the connectors of ZVK and ZVM are described. INPUTS Additional receiver inputs See chapter 2.4.1.2 (N-sockets b1 and b2) Ext.
Page 89 Rear View Fig. 1-2 Rear View 1043.0009.50 1.14...
Page 90: Rear View Zvr, Zvk And Zvm
Rear View 1.2.2 Rear View ZVR, ZVK and ZVM Power switch See chapter 1, sections 1.3.4 and 1.3.5 Fuse holder AC supply connector See chapter 1, Power supply fans section 1.3.2.1 EXTERNAL GENERATOR Connectors for external generator See Appendix A EXTERNAL GENERATOR BLANK control...
Page 91 Rear View Fig. 1-2 Rear View 1043.0009.50 1.16...
Page 92 Rear View Parallel interface See chapter 1, (printer interface, Centronics-compatible) section 1.6 and Appendix A IEC1 IEC BUS IEC/IEEE-bus connector 1 See chapter 1, section 1.6 and Appendix A IEC2 IEC SYSTEM BUS IEC/IEEE-bus connector 2 See chapter 1, section 1.6 and Appendix A PC MONITOR PC MONITOR...
Page 93 Rear View Fig. 1-2 Rear View 1043.0009.50 1.18...
Page 94 Rear View PORT BIAS Power supply fuses for high-impedance See Append. A FUSE probes 1 and 2 (supply outputs at the front) IEC127 IEC127 F500L/250V F500L/250V PROBE 1 FUSES PROBE 2 FUSES (not for ZVK and ZVM) See Append. A DC input for active probes connected to port 1 and 2 and associated fuses (with the use of an active test set)
Page 95: Start-Up
After the instrument has been removed from its packaging, please insure that all deliverable items are present as follows: • Vector network analyzer (ZVR, ZVRE, ZVRL, ZVC, ZVCE, ZVM or ZVK) • AC power cable, keyboard, mouse • Operating manual Now check the instrument for visible mechanical damage.
Page 96: 19" Rack Installation
Start-Up 1.3.2.2 19" Rack Installation Important Note: rack installation, insure that flow side-panel perforations and the air exhaust at the rear panel is not obstructed. The instrument may be mounted in a 19" rack by using the rack adapter kit ZZA-95 (order number: 396.4911.00).
Page 97: Battery-Powered Memory
Start-Up ON/STANDBY switch on the front panel Standby ½ ON/STANDBY switch is not depressed. The yellow LED (STANDBY) is illuminated. The DC STBY power supply is supplied with power. Caution: Operation ½ ON/STANDBY is depressed. In standby mode, the AC power voltage is present The green LED (ON) is illuminated.
Page 98: Controller Function
Controller Function Controller Function Caution: - The drivers used in the integrated controller function are adapted to the measuring instrument. Only the settings described below should be resorted to. The existing driver software should be modified only with the update software released by Rohde&Schwarz.
Page 99 Controller Function Additional Software The following program packages were successfully tested for their compliance with the measuring instruments software: ½ ZVR-K9 – software for virtual transformation networks ½ FileShredder – for secure deletion of files from hard disk ½ Symantec Norton AntiVirus – virus protection software 1043.0009.50 1.24...
Page 100: Connecting A Mouse
Connecting a Mouse Connecting a Mouse Caution: The mouse may only be connected when the instrument is switched off (STANDBY). Otherwise, correct operation of the mouse and instrument cannot be guaranteed. The instrument has the facility to simplify operation by connecting a mouse to the rear-panel PS/2- mouse connector (MOUSE) for .
Page 101: Connecting An External Monitor
Connecting an External Monitor Connecting an External Monitor Caution: The monitor may only be connected when the instrument is switched off (STANDBY). Otherwise, the monitor may be damaged. Do not modify the screen driver (display type) since this would disturb instrument operation.
Page 102 Connecting an External Monitor Display of the controller screen - Connection to PC MONITOR connector Connection After connecting the monitor external monitor operation should be selected. Setting is performed in the SYSTEM SETUP-GENERAL SETUP menu (key group: SYSTEM, see in Chapter 2, the section "Presettings and Interface Configuration"): Call SETUP-GENERAL SETUP menu SYSTEM...
Page 103: Connecting An Output Device
Connecting an Output Device Connecting an Output Device Caution: The output device may be connected only when the instrument is switched off (STANDBY) Note: - The installation of some printer drivers is possible only under the administrator identification (see section "Controller Function"). - After the installation, the "Service Pack X"...
Page 104 Connecting an Output Device 2. Selection and installation of the printer driver The selection and installation of the printer driver, the assignment to the interface and the setting of most of the printer-specific parameters (eg paper size) is performed under Windows NT in the START - SETTINGS - PRINTER menu.
Page 105 Connecting an Output Device In the following example, a HP DeskJet 660C printer is connected to interface LPT1 and configured as DEVICE2 of the instrument to output hardcopies of the measurement screen. Switch off device. Connect printer to interface LPT1. Switch on device.
Page 106 Connecting an Output Device ½ Select LPT1 port. The selection is marked by a tick. ½ Click "Next". The available printer drivers are displayed. The left-hand selection table indicates the manufacturers and the right-hand one the available printer drivers. ½ Mark "HP"...
Page 107 Connecting an Output Device ½ Click "Next". A query is displayed for providing the printer in the network. This query is irrelevant when installing a local printer. The answer "Not shared" is preset. ½ Click "Next". The window for starting a test page is displayed.
Page 108 Connecting an Output Device ½ Press the SETTINGS key in the COPY field. H AR D CO P Y COPY HARDCO PY DEVICE The SETTING menu is opened. START COLOR OF F SETTING TRC CO LOR AUTO I NC HARDCOPY ½...
Page 109 Connecting an Output Device ½ Press one of the unit keys. HARDCOPY DEVICE SETTINGS DATA ENTRY Device1 WINDOWS METAFILE -dB m The selection box DEVICE is closed and Print to File HP DeskJet 660C is entered in line Orientation DEVICE2. Device2 HP Deskjet 660C Print to File...
Page 110: Connecting A Cd-Rom Drive
Connecting a CD-ROM Drive Connecting a CD-ROM Drive Caution: The CD-ROM may only be connected when the instrument is switched off (STANDBY). If this is not observed correct operation of the CD-ROM and the instrument cannot be guaranteed. Notes: The installation of a CD-ROM is possible only under the administrator identification (see section "Controller Function").
Page 111 Connecting a CD-ROM Drive ½ Mark entry "Shut down and log on as a different user". ½ Press Shift key and click button "Yes" at the same time. The login window is displayed. ½ Enter "administrator" under "name" and "894129" under "password", confirm entry with "OK".
Page 112: Firmware Update
Firmware Update 1.10 Firmware Update The installation of a new firmware version can be performed using the built-in diskette drive and does not require opening the spectrum analyzer. The firmware update kit contains several diskettes. The installation program is called up in the SYSTEM - SETUP menu. Insert diskette 1 into the drive.
Page 113: Installing Windows Nt Software
Installing Windows NT Software 1.11 Installing Windows NT Software The driver software and the system settings of Windows NT are exactly adapted to the measurement functions of the instrument. Correct operation of the instrument can therefore be guaranteed only if the software and hardware used is released or offered by Rohde &...
Page 114: Options
Options 1.12 Options 1.12.1 Option FSE-B17 – Third IEC/IEEE Interface Notes: - The installation of option FSE-B17 is possible only under the administrator identification (see section "Controller Function"). - After the installation, the "Service Pack X" of Windows NT is to be re-installed, see "New Installation of Windows NT Software".
Page 115 Options ½ Mark "GPIB0" in the "GPIB Board" list. ½ Mark "AT-GPIB/TNT" in the "Board Type" list. ½ Confirm the selection with "OK". "GPIB Configuration" menu displayed again. ½ Click button "Configure". The "GPIB0 (AT-GPIB/TNT)" menu for configuring the board is opened. Configuring the board ½...
Page 116 Options Setting the parameters for the connected equipment ½ Mark the instrument in the "Device Template" list and confirm selection with "OK". The "DEV.. Settings" menu is opened. ½ Perform the settings for the selected unit in the "DEV.. Settings" menu. The logic name for the instrument is preset with DEV1 and address 20.
Page 117: Operation
Options 1.12.1.2 Operation The second IEC/IEEE-bus interface corresponds physically to that of the instrument (see appendix A). If the instrument is to be controlled via the IEC/IEEE bus, a bus cable must be plugged to both bus connectors. The interface can be driven under DOS/WINDOWS3.1/95/NT by user-written software. The handling of IEC/IEEE-bus commands in user programs is described in the manual for the card.
Page 118: 2Option Fse-B16 - Ethernet Adapter
Options 1.12.2 Option FSE-B16 – Ethernet Adapter With the option Ethernet Adapter FSE-B16, the device can be connected to an Ethernet-LAN (local area network). It is possible to transmit data via the network and to use the network printer. The adapter operates with a 10 MHz Ethernet in line with standards IEEE 802.3 10Base2 (Thin Ethernet, CheaperNet, BNC-Net) (B16 model 03) or 10Base5 (Thick Ethernet) (B16 model 02).
Page 119: Software Installation
Options AUI (Thick Ethernet; FSE-B16 Var. 02 Connection The device is connected to the LAN segment using a transceiver cable (DB-15 AUI connector, not part of the equipment supplied) which is connected to the rear panel and to the transceiver. The connection does not conflict with the network traffic.
Page 120 Options Calling up Configuration Menu for Network Settings ½ Click "Start" in the task bar. ½ Click consecutively "Settings", "Control Panel" and "Network". The "Network" configuration menu for network settings is opened. Registering the Identification Note: It is important for the computer name to be unique in the network.. ½...
Page 121 Options Installation and Configuration of the Driver for the Network Adapter ½ Select "Adapter". ½ Click "Add" and mark network driver "SMC 8416 EtherEZ" and select with "OK". The query "Files.." is displayed. ½ Answer it by clicking "Continue". The "SMCEthernet Card Setup" window is displayed.
Page 122 Options Installation of Network Services To utilize the resources of the network it is necessary to install the corresponding services. Note: The network administrator knows which services are to be used. ½ Select "Services". ½ Click "Add", mark the desired service and select with "OK".
Page 123: Operation
Options Examples of Configurations Network Protocols Services Notes NOVELL Netware NWLink IPX/SPX Client Service for The "Frame Type" used under "Protocols - Compatible NetWare Properties" should be set. Transport IP networks TCP/IP Protocol Simple TCP/IP An "IP Address" unambiguous in the network (FTP, TELNET, WWW, Services should be set under "Protocols - Properties".
Page 124 Options Installing a user After the network software has been installed, the instrument logs with an error message during the next start-up since there is no user "Instrument" (= user identification for NT autologin) in the network. It is therefore necessary to install a user which should be the same for Windows NT and for the network. The network administrator is responsible for the installation of new users in the network.
Page 125 Options Only NOVELL network: ½ Click "Start" in the task bar. Configure NOVELL Client ½ Click consecutively "Settings", "Control Panel", "CSNW". NOVELL 3.x ½ Click "Preferred Server". ½ Under "Select Preferred Server" select the NOVELL server for which the user has been installed.
Page 126 Options ½ Select the drive under "Drive:" ½ Activate "Reconnect at Logon:" if the link is to be automatically established at each unit start. ½ Connect the network path to the selected drive with "OK". The user name and the password are queried.
Page 127 Options ½ Double-click line "Add Printer". The "Add Printer Wizard" window is opened. This window leads through the following printer driver installation. ½ Click first "Network Printer Source" and then "Next". The list of available network printers is displayed. ½ Mark the printer and select with "OK". The available printer drivers are displayed.
Page 128 Options ½ Click "Next". The window for starting a test page is displayed. The test print is for checking if the installation was successful. ½ Switch on printer. ½ Click Yes (recommended)". ½ Click "Finish". A test page is printed out if the installation was successful.
Page 129 Options For a complete description of the functions and commands see the FTP documentation. ½ Click "Start" and then "Run" in the task bar. Establishing a connection The program is started with the DOS command The following command sets up the connection: OPEN <xx.xx.xx.xx>...
Page 130: Manual Operation
Overview of the most important PRESET settings Parameter Standard setting Output level –10 dBm Frequency range Start 9 kHz (ZVR,ZVRE,ZVRL with passive bridges) 300 kHz (ZVR,ZVRE,ZVRL with active bridges) 20 kHz (ZVC,ZVCE) 4 GHz (ZVR,ZVRE, ZVRL) Stop 8 GHz (ZVC,ZVCE) Frequency...
Page 131: Transmission Measurements - Measurement Of Gain And Loss
Transmission Measurements 2.1.1 Transmission Measurements – Measurement of Gain and Loss 2.1.1.1 Measurement Task The transmission measurement measures the characteristic of the insertion loss or the gain factor of a DUT in relation to the frequency. The insertion loss /gain of a DUT is the ratio of the amplitude of the output signal to the amplitude of the input signal.
Page 132: Setting The Analyzer
Transmission Measurements 2.1.1.4 Setting the Analyzer Following PRESET, channel 1 performs a S mesurement and represents it in the Smith diagram. The transmission measurement described in this example is to be represented in various diagrams. 1. Set measurement type (S21, or forward RESPONSE transmission) MEAS...
Page 133 Transmission Measurements STIMULUS Set stop frequency ½ Press STIMULUS STOP key. The data entry ST ART ST OP field is opened. CENTER SPAN DATA ENTRY STOP ½ Enter 2.27 via the numeric keypad and 2.27 GHz terminate the entry using the G/n key. 4.
Page 134: Fig. 2-1 Measurement Display Screen With An Autoscaled Trace
Transmission Measurements US ER SCALE MAG 20dB/ REF0dB Fig. 2-1 Measurement display screen with an autoscaled trace 1043.0009.50 E-13...
Page 135 Transmission Measurements Alternative b) Manual positioning Enter the following values. • Reference position 9 • Reference value -5 dB • Scaling 10 dB / DIV Set reference position RESPONSE The 2nd horizontal diagram line from the top is to MEAS FORMAT SCALE coincide with the reference line.
Page 136 Transmission Measurements RESPONSE Set scaling MEAS FORMAT SCALE The distance beween the scaling lines is to be equal to 10 dB. DIAGRAM DISPLAY TRACE SCALE/DIV ½ Press RESPONSE SCALE key. ½ Press RESPONSE SCALE - SCALE/DIV key. The data entry field for the scaling is opened. DATA ENTRY SCALE / DIV 10 dB...
Page 137: Instrument Calibration
Transmission Measurements 2.1.1.5 Instrument Calibration The analyzer calibration menu offers selection of various system error corrections. A simple and fast method is the normalization calibration which calibrates the frequency response of the test setup. (Refer to Section 2.15 for further information on various calibration methods). 1.
Page 138: Performing The Measurement
Transmission Measurements 2.1.1.6 Performing the Measurement 1. Remove through-connection. 2. Connect DUT. 3. If necessary: repeat trace positioning (cf. 2.1.1.4, Setting the Analyzer). 4. Display magnitude cartesian coordinates RESPONSE ½ Press RESPONSE FORMAT key. MEAS FORMAT SCALE ½ Press RESPONSE FORMAT - MAGNITUDE DIAGRAM DISPLAY TRACE MAGNITUDE softkey.
Page 139 Transmission Measurements 5. Display of phase in cartesian coordinates RESPONSE ½ Press RESPONSE FORMAT key. MEAS FORMAT SCALE DIAGRAM DISPLAY TRACE ½ Press PHASE RESPONSE FORMAT PHASE softkey. By default (following STATUS PRESET), the phase is represented in cartesian coordinates with a specified range of -225°...
Page 140: Output Of Measurement Results
Transmission Measurements 2.1.1.7 Output of Measurement Results By default (following STATUS PRESET), a printer driver for a plotter with HPGL capability and connection to the IEC bus (address 4) is active. 1. Start printing COPY ½ Connect plotter to the IEC bus. C OP Y ½...
Page 141: Reflection Measurements
Reflection Measurements 2.1.2 Reflection Measurements 2.1.2.1 Measurement Task The reflection coefficient is the complex ratio between the wave quantity reflected from the input of a DUT and the wave quantity of the signal propagating towards this input. The logarithmic inverse of the magnitude of the reflection coefficient is also called matching and is ≥...
Page 142: Instrument Calibration
Reflection Measurements 2.1.2.5 Instrument Calibration The analyzer calibration menu offers selection of various methods for a system error correction. A simple and fast method is the normalization calibration which calibrates the frequency response of the bridge and transmission lines, if fitted. (Refer to Section 2.15 for further information on calibration methods).
Page 143: Performing The Measurement
Reflection Measurements 2.1.2.6 Performing the Measurement 1. Remove open circuit. 2. Connect DUT 3. If necessary: repeat trace positioning, (see Section 2.1.2.4). 4. Display of magnitude in cartesian coordinates US ER FORMAT DB MAG 5dB/ REF 0dB Fig. 2-5 Display of magnitude in cartesian coordinates 1043.0009.50 2.14 E-13...
Page 144: Fig. 2-6 Display Of Phase In Cartesian Coordinates
Reflection Measurements 5. Display of phase in cartesian coordinates see Section 2.1.1, transmission measurement With standard settings, "phase" represented in cartesian coordinates with a specified range of -225° to +225°. US ER FORMAT φ 45°/ REF 0° Fig. 2-6 Display of phase in cartesian coordinates 1043.0009.50 2.15 E-13...
Page 145 Reflection Measurements 6. Display of the reflection coefficient in the RESPONSE Smith diagram MEAS FORMAT SCALE ½ Press RESPONSE FORMAT key. DIAGRAM DIS PLAY TRACE ½ Press RESPONSE FORMAT - COMPLEX COMPLEX softkey. US ER FORMAT -2.0 -0.5 -1.0 STOP 2.27 GHz START 2.17 GHz Fig.
Page 146: Filter Measurements Measurements Of Bandwidth, Q Factor And Shape Factor
Filter Measurements Filter Measurements − Measurements of Bandwidth, Q Factor and 2.1.3 Shape Factor 2.1.3.1 Measurement Task The parameters bandwidth, Q factor and shape factor characterize a bandpass or bandstop filter and can be measured automatically by the network analyzer. The bandwidth represents the frequency difference between two points of the same attenuation (often 3 dB) of the passband curve.
Page 147 Filter Measurements 2. Determination of the 3 dB bandwidth of a bandpass WIDTH WIDTH ½ Press DEFINE B’DFILTER - WIDTH softkey. 1 dB DATA ENTRY WIDTH ½ Enter 3 via the numeric keypad and terminate 3 dB the entry using the x1 key. ½...
Page 148: Fig. 2-8 Determination Of The 3 Db Bandwidth Of A Bandpass
Filter Measurements USER MARKER SEARCH SEARCH SEARCH NEXT SEARCH NEXT -> SEARCH <- NEXT TRACKING MAX MODE MIN MODE TARGET MODE BANDFILTER MODE DEFINE B’DFILTER Fig. 2-8 Determination of the 3 dB bandwidth of a bandpass 1043.0009.50 2.19 E-13...
Page 149 Filter Measurements 3. Determination of the Q-Factor ½ Press DEFINE MARKER SEARCH DEFINE B’DFILTER B’DFILTER softkey. QUALITY ½ Press MARKER SEARCH DEFINE FACTOR B’DFILTER - QUALITY FACTOR softkey. The filter quality is indicated in the marker-info line. ½ Press menu change key to return to the MARKER SEARCH menu.
Page 150 Filter Measurements 4. Shape factor 60 dB/3 dB The shape factor is a measure for the filter skirt selectivity. It is calculated from the 60-dB and 3 dB bandwidths according to the formula Shape factor 60 dBB/3 dB = ∆ f 60 dB / ∆ f 3 dB. ½...
Page 151: Processing Of Measured Values
Processing of Measured Values 2.1.4 Processing of Measured Values The numbers in brackets in the text refer to Fig. 2-11 which shows the processing sequence of measured values of a ZVR display channel in bidirectional operation. Note that for reasons of clarity the diagram does not contain any recursive measurement sequences which arise, e.g., in compression and intercept point measurements.
Page 152 The parameters in the denominator a and a are obtained from the so-called reference channels on models ZVR, ZVC, ZVK and ZVM. On ZVRE and ZVCE, however, a and a are measured on the same physical receive channel, the assignment being dependent on the through direction of the RF switch.
Page 153 Processing of Measured Values to the corresponding inductance or capacitance. If the DUT is a line, it is possible to determine its phase delay and its electrical or mechanical length from the phase difference between the first and the last sweep point.
Page 154: Menu Overview
Menu Overview Menu Overview 2.2.1 SYSTEM Key Group MODE SYSTEM TIME DOMAIN MODE EXTERNAL EXTERNAL TIME DOMAIN COMPRESS SWEEP TYPE DOMAIN FREQENCY TIME FREQ SETUP CONVERS TIME COMPRESS GATE INFO DEF TIME SWEEP TYPE GATE DEF TRANSF COMPRESS REFERENCE TYPE POINT MIXER FREQUENCY...
Page 155 Menu Overview DEF COM P DEF SO I DEF TOI PNT M EAS M EAS M EAS SRC POWER SRC POWER SRC POWER MAX LIMIT MAX LIMIT MAX LIMIT SRC POWER SRC POWER SRC POWER MIN LIMIT MIN LIMIT MIN LIMIT SETTLING SETTLING SETTLING...
Page 156 Menu Overview SYSTEM SETUP SYSTEM MODE GENERAL SETUP SETUP REFERENCE GENERAL OPTIONS INFO SETUP ENABLE NEW GPIB FREQUENCY OPTION ADDRESS EXT LEVEL USER CONTROL PORT A USER OPTIONS PORT B PORT 1 PORT 2 TIME SERVICE DATE MONITOR CONNECTED AUTOKAL CONNECTED SERVICE SERVICE...
Page 157 Menu Overview SYSTEM INFO MESSAGES SYSTEM MODE CLEAR FIRMWARE MESSAGE VERSIONS SETUP CLEAR ALL CLEAR ALL HARDWARE + MESSAGES MESSAGES OPTIONS INFO UPDATE SYSTEM MESSAGES MESSAGES FIRMWARE OPTIONS 1043.0009.50 2.28 E-13...
Page 158: Copy Key Group
Menu Overview 2.2.2 COPY Key Group COPY COPY SETTINGS SETTINGS COPY COPY LINE STYLE HARDCOPY ENTER SELECT SCREEN COPY DEVICE TEXT QUADRANT LINE STYLE COPY TRACE COMMENT SETTINGS UPPER CHANNEL 1 DEVICE 1 LEFT COPY LINE STYLE SETTINGS MEM TRACE COMMENT SETTINGS LOWER...
Page 159: Memory Key Group
Menu Overview 2.2.3 MEMORY Key Group MEMORY MEMORY CONFIG CONFIG MEMORY DISK COPY SAVE DISK EDIT LABEL PATH RECALL FORMAT COPY DISK CONFIG DELETE UNDELETE RENAME MAKE DIRECTORY SORT MODE PAGE UP PAGE UP PAGE DOWN PAGE DOWN MEMORY SEL ITEMS MEMORY SAVE MEMORY...
Page 160 Menu Overview ASCII FILE ASCII FILE DISPLAYED ASCII DATA MATH TOUCHSTONE SUPER FORMAT COMPACT TIME DOMAIN COMPLEX REAL AND CONVERS IMAGINARY LIN MAG AND PHASE dB MAG AND PHASE APPEND DEC SEP . DEC SEP , SEL ITEMS MEMORY MEMORY TO RECALL MEMORY RECALL...
Page 161: User Key
Menu Overview 2.2.4 USER Key DEFINE USER MENU MACRO USER (MACRO 1) RECORD (MACRO 2) DEFINE PAUSE (MACRO 3) FIRST LINE (MACRO 4) LAST LINE DELETE (MACRO 5) LINE DELETE (MACRO 6) MACRO MACRO (MACRO 7) TITLE SELECT CONTINUE MACRO MACRO DEFINE PAGE UP...
Page 162: Sweep Key Group
Menu Overview 2.2.5 SWEEP Key Group SWEEP SWEEP TRIGGER TRIGGER SWEEP SWEEP DIR SINGLE FREE RUN POINT SWEEP RESTART SWEEP SLOPE LIN SWEEP EXTERNAL START HOLD CONTINUOUS SOURCE LOG SWEEP LINE SWEEP NUMBER OF PERIODIC EDIT TIMER SEG SWEEP SWEEPS TIMER PERIOD DEF SWEEP...
Page 163 Menu Overview This key has no softkey menu assigned. SWEEP SWEEP RESTART SOURCE SOURCE SOURCE EXT SRC 1 SWEEP POWER POWER SWEEP RESTART EXT SRC 1 SLOPE SLOPE CAL EXT SOURCE SRC1 POWER a1 POWER a2 POWER EXT SRC 2 STEP ATT POWER EXT SRC 2...
Page 164: Marker Key Group
Menu Overview 2.2.6 MARKER Key Group MARKER MARKER MARKER MARKER MARKER CONVERSION MARKER MARKER FORMAT FORMAT MARKER MARKER 1 MARKER 5 MAGNITUDE MARKER SEARCH MARKER 2 MARKER 6 1 / S MAGNITUDE DELTA = MKR PHASE MARKER 3 MARKER 7 ELEMENTS REAL MARKER 4...
Page 165 Menu Overview MARKER DEFINE SEARCH B’DFILTER MARKER SEARCH SEARCH MARKER SEARCH SEARCH BANDPASS NEXT DELTA = MKR SEARCH BANDSTOP NEXT -> SEARCH <- NEXT TRACKING MAX MODE WIDTH QUALITY MIN MODE FACTOR TARGET SHAPEFACT MODE 60dB / 3dB BANDFILTER SHAPEFACT MODE 60dB / 6dB DEFINE...
Page 166: Lines Key Group
Menu Overview 2.2.7 LINES Key Group LINES LINES ENTRY LINE1 LINE2 LINES LIMITS COMPLEX MAGN PHASE MOVE LINE SHOW LINE SHOW LINE INFO INTERSECT DELTA X DEFINE LIMITS DEFINE MOVE LINE CIRCLE SECTIONS SELECT DEL ALL LINES CENTER X USE MARKER LINE SECTIONS LINES...
Page 167: Response Key Group
Menu Overview 2.2.8 RESPONSE Key Group INPUT MEAS COMPLEX RATIO MEAS CONVERS SELECT DEFINE RESPONSE DC MEAS UNIT RATIO REFL PORT1 INPUT 1 MEAS FORMAT SCALE CONV GAIN DC MEAS INPUT 2 |b1/a1| TRANS FWD CONV GAIN DIAGRAM DISPLAY TRACE |b2/a1| TRANS REV b1/a1...
Page 168 Menu Overview ZOOM SCALE RESPONSE CENTER X AUTOSCALE MEAS FORMAT SCALE CENTER Y SCALE/DIV REFERENCE DIAGRAM DISPLAY TRACE SIZE X VALUE REFERENCE SIZE Y POSITION RADIUS MAX VALUE MIN VALUE CONSTANT ZOOM ZOOM DIAGRAM DIAGRAM DEF POLAR DEF CART SEGMENTS SEGMENTS RESPONSE DEL ALL...
Page 169 Menu Overview DISPLAY CONFIG DATA ENTRY COLORS DISPLAY FIELD RESPONSE SINGLE SELECT COLORS X POSITION CHANNEL OBJECT MEAS FORMAT SCALE DUAL CHAN DATA ENTRY Y POSITION TINT OVERLAY FIELD DUAL CHAN DIAGRAM DISPLAY TRACE BRIGHTNESS SPLIT SCR. SAVER QUAD CHAN DEFAULT SATURATION OVERLAY...
Page 170: Cal Key Group
Menu Overview 2.2.9 CAL Key Group START PORT 1 PORT 1 NEW CAL CONNECTOR CONNECTOR Ω FULL N 50 SEXLESS START TWO PORT FEMALE USR CONN1 NEW CAL Ω REPEAT N 50 AUTOKAL PREV CAL MALE Ω RESUME FULL N 75 USR CONN 2 OFFSET ONE PORT...
Page 171 Menu Overview SELECT KIT CAL KITS CONNECTOR Ω N 50 TYPE ACTIVATE Ω N 75 MODIFY STANDARDS VIEW PC 7 ACTIVE STD CREATE INST FILE RESTORE INSTD KITS LIST PC 3.5 INSTD KITS INSTALL NEW KIT USER CONN SEXLESS NAME USR CONN 1 USER CONN USER KIT...
Page 172 Menu Overview FULL PORT 1 PORT 1 PORT 2 PORT 2 ONE PORT CONNECTOR CONNECTOR CONNECTOR CONNECTOR Ω Ω SEXLESS N 50 SEXLESS N 50 BOTH PORTS USR CONN1 FEMALE USR CONN1 FEMALE Ω Ω N 50 N 50 MALE MALE Ω...
Page 173 Menu Overview PORT 1 PORT 1 ONE PATH CONNECTOR CONNECTOR TWO PORT Ω N 50 SEXLESS FEMALE USR CONN1 N 50 Ω MALE N 75 Ω USR CONN 2 FEMALE FEMALE N 75 Ω USR CONN 2 MALE MALE FORWARD PC 7 REVERSE FEMALE...
Page 174 Menu Overview REFL NORM REFL NORM REFL NORM REFL NORM TRANS NORM FORWARD CAL MEAS CAL MEAS CAL MEAS BOTH DIRECT´NS FORWARD THROUGH BOTH PORTS OPEN OPEN REVERSE PORT 1 PORT 1 PORT 1 OPEN OPEN PORT 2 PORT 2 PORT 2 APPLY CAL APPLY CAL...
Page 175 Menu Overview FUNDAM´TAL FUNDAM´TAL FUNDAM´TAL FUNDAM´TAL CAL MEAS CAL MEAS CAL MEAS CAL MEAS OPEN THROUGH PORT 1 OPEN SHORT PORT 1 PORT 1 SLIDE OPEN MATCH PORT 2 PORT 1 PORT 1 MATCH SLIDE PORT 1 PORT 1 MATCH SLIDE THROUGH PORT 2...
Page 176 Menu Overview TOSM TOM-X TOSM THROUGH THROUGH OPEN MATCH PORT 1 BOTH PORTS OPEN OPEN PORT 2 BOTH PORTS SHORT MATCH P1 PORT 1 OPEN P2 OPEN P1 SHORT MATCH P2 PORT 2 MATCH SLIDE PORT 1 PORT 1 MATCH SLIDE PORT 2 PORT 2...
Page 177: Basic Steps Of Operation
Subdivision of screen 2.3 Basic Steps of Operation Manual operation of the network analyzer is by means of keys and softkey menus. Device and test parameters can either be set directly via softkeys with switching function or by entering values into the fields or tables.
Page 178: The Diagram Area
Subdivision of screen The screen is subdivided into two areas: Diagram area This area contains the measuring diagrams and other measured-value information as well as the parameters and status information which are important for the analysis of the results. In addition, message fields, entry windows and tables are shown in this area.
Page 179 Subdivision of screen Information line σ2: MAG 20 dB/ REF 0 dB -9.384 dB The information line offers additional information on the diagram either in all or in a few of its eight fields. The following information is given from the left to the right: Active channel.
Page 180 Subdivision of screen Information line (continued) Logarithmation in active channel This field indicates whether the formatted parameter (see next field below) is displayed as linear parameter (LIN) or if a logarithmic value is calculated prior to display. In the case of logarithmic values the ordinate scaling can be selected to be logarithmic (LOG) or linear (dB).
Page 181 Subdivision of screen Information line (continued) Formatting the test parameter in the active channel Cartesian diagram: The format display indicates whether the selected test parameter of the active channel is converted into a scalar component and if so in which one. The following components are possible: magnitude φ...
Page 182 Subdivision of screen Information line (continued) REF 0 dB Scaling of measuring diagram in active channel Cartesian diagram: In case of the SCALE / DIV entry, the ordinate value of the reference line (reference value) is output in the second scaling field behind REF, in case of MIN / MAX entry the highest ordinate value of the diagram is displayed after an upward arrow.
Page 183 Subdivision of screen Enhancement labels (continued) (alternatively) The arbitrary frequency conversion is activated (mode: SYSTEM MODE-FREQ CONVERS-ARBITRARY). The compression point measurement is activated (mode: SYSTEM MODE-COMP SOI TOI-COMPRESS POINT). (alternatively) The measurement of the second-order intercept point is activated. (mode: SYSTEM MODE - COMP SOI TOI - SOI). (alternatively) The measurement of the third-order intercept point is activated (mode: SYSTEM MODE-COMP SOI TOI-TOI).
Page 184 Subdivision of screen (alternatively) The power correction with offset is switched on, ie, the a1/a1I rated value of a generator level calibration was modified subsequent to a2/a21 calibration. A calibration offset is not displayed for external generators. b1/b2/b12 E1/E2/E12 1043.0009.50 2.55 E-13...
Page 185 Subdivision of screen Enhancement labels (continued) (alternatively) The level correction is switched on, but the rated value of 1/a1I the level was not attained at all test points during the calibration, or the a2/a21 level offset is so large that the setting range of a generator is exceeded. b1/b2/b12 E1/E2/E12 The display channels are coupled...
Page 186 Subdivision of screen Sweep indicator The sweep indicator is a progress bar at the lower edge of the screen showing the current state of the sweep. This is particularly useful for slow sweeps or for the representation of measured values in circle diagrams.
Page 187 Subdivision of screen Measuring diagram The measuring diagram is displayed in the diagram area of the screen. Different types of diagram may be selected (see Section 2.14.4, RESPONSE DIAGRAM menu): – Cartesian diagrams with linear and/or logarithmic scaling and – various circle diagrams such as polar diagrams with linear or logarithmic radial scaling, Smith charts, inverted Smith charts and...
Page 188: The Softkey Area
Subdivision of screen 2.3.1.2 The Softkey Area The softkey area is subdivided into the menu title, the actual softkey menu and the menu display. The menu title is displayed above the 10 softkeys. The softkey labelling and function depends on the respective menu.
Page 189: Subdivision Of Screen - Display Modes
Subdivision of screen The menu display comprises three arrows which indicate the corresponding direction to be used to move within the menu tree. Arrows ⇐ and ⇒ are displayed only if a right or left side menu is available. Arrow ⇑ is displayed in submenus only and indicates that a higher menu level can be accessed. The arrows of the menu display are assigned to the menu change keys on the front panel below the softkey bar: Keys and associated...
Page 190: Dual Channel Overlay Overlay
Subdivision of screen 2.3.2.2 Dual Channel Overlay Overlay Apart from the active channel, an additional channel is displayed. The channels are assigned to each other in pairs of two. Either channel 1 and channel 2 or, alternatively, channel 3 and channel 4 can be displayed simultaneously.
Page 191: Quad Channel Overlay
Subdivision of screen 2.3.2.4 Quad Channel Overlay The diagrams for all of the four channels are superimposed. Four information lines are arranged one on top of other with the order from top to bottom corresponding to the channel numbers. With decoupled channels, the sweep lines are arranged in the same way.
Page 192: Quad Channel Quad Split
Subdivision of screen 2.3.2.6 Quad Channel Quad Split All of the four channels are displayed in separate sections. Channel 1 is displayed in the upper left quarter, channel 2 in the lower left quarter, channel 3 in the upper right quarter and channel 4 in the lower right quarter of the screen.
Page 193: Diagrams
Diagrams 2.3.3 Diagrams The network analyzer offers various types of diagram for selection: é Cartesian diagrams with linear and/or logarithmic scaling, é Circle diagrams – polar diagrams, – Smith charts, – inverted Smith charts and – charter diagram. The type of diagram is selected in the RESPONSE DIAGRAM menu. 2.3.3.1 Cartesian Diagrams A number of Cartesian diagrams may be selected.
Page 194: Fig. 2-15 Cartesian Diagram With Two Segments On The Abscissa And Ordinate (Single Channel), Each With Limit Lines And Fail Message
Diagrams Abscissa scaling The START and STOP or CENTER and SPAN keys in the STIMULUS key field specify the subdivision of the abscissa. The axis labelling can be masked out for each channel, individually (RESPONSE DIAGRAM - GRID ANNOTATION softkey). Linear abscissa division The abscissa is scaled automatically depending on the sweep range selected.
Page 195 Diagrams Segmented abscissa For a segmented sweep with up to three non-overlapping segments, these segments can be separated graphically. In this display mode, all segments are of equal width whereas the swept range may differ in size. The segments may be scaled linearly or logarithmically (see Section 2.10, "Sweep Settings").
Page 196 Diagrams The logarithm function assigns real values to positive numbers, only. In order to allow for the representation of negative values and values with alternating signs in a logarithmic scale, the diagram is subdivided into an upper and a lower half. Logarithms of positive values are displayed in the upper half of the diagram, as usual.
Page 197: Polar Diagrams
Diagrams Segmented ordinate Similar to the abscissa, the ordinate can be graphically subdivided into up to three segments. In this display mode, all segments are of equal width, whereas the swept range may differ in size. Unlike for the segmentation of the abscissa, however, the values of the borders of adjacent segments have to coincide, ie there must be no gaps between the segments.
Page 198 Diagrams The radial axis is not labelled. The scaling is indicated in the Radial Scaling information line. Linear radial axis The linear, radial scaling can be defined in the RESPONSE SCALE menu in two different ways.. • The fifth-division scale which is defined using the SCALE/DIV, REFERENCE VALUE and REFERENCE POSITION softkeys.
Page 199: Fig. 2-18 Lin./ Log. Polar Diagram With 2 Segments (Single Channel)
Diagrams Segmented radial axis Analogous to the ordinate of a Cartesian diagram, the radial axis of a polar diagram can be graphically subdivided into two segments. In this display mode, both (circular) segments are of equal width, whereas the swept range may differ in size. The MIN- and MAX values indicated in the information line always refer to the maximum value of the exterior segment and to the minimum value of the interior segment.
Page 200: Smith Charts
Diagrams Circular scaling Circular scaling of the polar diagrams means the subdivision of the full circle of the diagram into sectors (ie the circle is sliced like a pie). Circular scaling is particularly suited for approximately reading off the phase of a measured complex value.
Page 201: Inverted Smith Charts
Diagrams 2.3.3.4 Inverted Smith Charts The same specifications which apply to the non-inverted Smith chart are valid for inverted diagram. The significant difference is that, instead of the impedance plane, the inverted impedance plane, ie the admittance plane is conformally mapped into the reflection-coefficient plane. Thus, compared to the ordinary Smith chart, the inverted Smith chart is a point-symmetric representation with respect to the matching point.
Page 202: Display Windows
Display Windows 2.3.4 Display Windows Display windows are located inside the measuring diagram and display primarily measured values. In general, display windows do not allow any user entries. Exceptions are fields for confirming actions and yes/no-decisions required after some system messages. The following windows are displayed: •...
Page 203 Display Windows switched on active Delta markers are represented by triangles with their delta marker delta marker peak facing upward. Again, the peak of the triangle points to the test point. Delta markers are labeled below the marker symbol. Similar to active markers, a filled triangle symbolizes an active delta marker.
Page 204 Display Windows Example of the representation of marker values with scalar formatting: Response value of the active marker -33.35 dB Marker field of the information line 123.982623 MHz Stimulus value of the active marker 4.775 MHz Measured value of band-filter measurement -11.66 dB 950.9197324 MHz Response and s timulus values of...
Page 205: System Messages
Display Windows 2.3.4.3 System Messages System messages are displayed if instrument settings occur which are erroneous or which require a decision to be taken by the user. The message field can be located at various positions: • General messages which are not directly related to the measurement, appear in the center of the screen.
Page 206: Scale Reference Fields
Display Windows Examples: WARNING Printer HPDJET on LPT1 is not ready. WARNING Disk in Drive A: is write-protected. Continue? CANCEL WARNING DATA ERROR READING DRIVE A: KEEP CANCEL SAVE Some system messages are directly produced by the instrument hardware and therefore not displayed in separate windows.
Page 207 Display Windows Scale reference field in zoomed The zooming area in a Smith chart is defined by specification of a circular section (the zoom circle) by means of circle center and Smith chart radius. The scaling info field thus consists of three lines: x coordinate -310 mU y coordinate...
Page 208: Calling And Changing The Menus
Changing the Menu 2.3.5 Calling and Changing the Menus The operation of the network analyzer is menu-controlled via keys and softkeys. Various softkey menus are displayed depending on the instrument status. The individual menus constitute the so-called menu tree. The top menu (the root of the menu tree) is always called by means of a keystroke. Each softkey menu consists of max.
Page 209 Changing the Menu The arrows are assigned to the menu change keys on the front panel below the softkey line, which allow for switching between the main menu and the supplementary menus and submenus: Softkeys and associated LC-Display hardkeys Arrows for menu display Keys for changing the menu...
Page 210: Setting The Parameters
Setting of Parameters 2.3.6 Setting the Parameters Parameters are set either by simple selection (selection parameters) or by alphanumeric entries in data entry windows. The numeric keypad on the front panel, an external keyboard (optional), a roll-key and the cursor keys are provided for the entry of instrument parameters in an entry window or in a table.
Page 211: Roll-Key And Cursor Keys
Setting of Parameters 2.3.6.2 Roll-key and Cursor Keys The roll-key and the cursor keys are arranged below the numeric keypad. The roll-key has various functions. • For entry, the instrument parameter is incremented (turning clockwise) or decremented (turning counter-clockwise) by a defined step size. The step size may be equal to or smaller (e.g., 1/10) than the step size being defined for the cursor keys (see description of the STEP key).
Page 212: Selection Of Parameters
Setting of Parameters 2.3.6.3 Selection of Parameters The selection of parameters and their settings is effected by means of a key, a softkey or in a table depending on the hierarchical level of the menu they are assigned to. Selection via key Most keys of the network analyzer are used to enter menus where the selection and the settings are made.
Page 213 Setting of Parameters 3. Various softkeys act like selection Example: sweep setting switches. Only one softkey may be ½ Press the SWEEP SWEEP key. active at a time. ½ Press menu-change key ½ Select the SWEEP SWEEP - CONTINOUS SWEEP softkey.
Page 214 Setting of Parameters The network analyzer uses numerous tables for display and Selection in a table configuration of instrument parameters. The tables differ considerably in the number of lines, columns and inscriptions. The basic steps of operation for the selection and setting of parameters are, however, the same for all tables.
Page 215 Setting of Parameters ½ Rotate the roll-key until the wanted field is marked. The cursor keys are used to specify the direction of the roll-key movement (horizontal or vertical) When shifting the cursor, elements may be skipped which can not be edited. Table elements, which can not be selected are indicated by a different color.
Page 216 Setting of Parameters b) Opening a data entry If a table entry consists of an (alpha-) numeric value, selection window of the latter causes the corresponding entry window to be opened. Note: numeric alphanumeric instrument parameters, the editing operation may be started by entering any number or letter on the front panel or on the external keyboard.
Page 217: Editing Of Numeric Parameters
Setting of Parameters 2.3.6.4 Editing of Numeric Parameters The entry of numeric values is always made in a data entry window, which is displayed automatically after selection of the parameter. Headline with parameter designation START FREQUENCY 10.2457535 GHz Editing line with parameter value and unit START FREQUENCY OUT OF RANGE Status and error messages The headline indicates the name of the instrument parameter, which has been selected.
Page 218 Setting of Parameters ½ Rotate the roll-key until reaching the required value. Entry via roll-key The parameter is varied by the step size which was set in the STEP menu for this parameter. The variation step size increases with increasing rotational speed. Turning the roll-key clockwise increments the value, turning it counterclockwise decrements the value.
Page 219 Setting of Parameters Correcting the entry ½ Position the cursor beside the digit which is to be Deleting an entry deleted using the cursor keys ½ Press the BACK key. The entry left to the cursor is deleted. ½ Enter new numbers. The number is inserted to the left of the cursor, the other numbers are shifted right.
Page 220: Editing With External Keyboard
Setting of Parameters 2.3.6.4.1 Editing With External Keyboard COMMENT CHANNEL 1 BANDPASS-FILTER TEST 23A Entry line Message line ½ Select parameter. Entry of text The data entry is active automatically upon calling the data entry window. The cursor is positioned at the beginning of the previous entry.
Page 221: Editing With Auxiliary Line Editor
Setting of Parameters 2.3.6.4.2 Editing with Auxiliary Line Editor If the external keyboard is not fitted, the auxiliary line editor is called automatically with entry of alphanumeric parameters. The auxiliary line editor is an extension of the alphanumeric entry window. It contains the complete alphabet with uppercase and lowercase letters as well as special characters in two lines of 52 characters, each.
Page 222: Disabling The Control Elements - Hold Key
Disabling the Control Elements 2.3.7 Disabling the Control Elements - HOLD Key The functions of the HOLD menu disable either a subset of the HOLD control elements or the complete instrument control in order to UNLOCK prevent parameters from being changed by mistake. HOLD The LED above the HOLD key indicates that the disable function has been activated.
Page 223: Setting The Step Size - Step Key
Mouse and External Keyboard Control 2.3.8 Setting the Step size - STEP Key The value of many of the numeric instrument parameters can be incremented or decremented in steps in a data entry window with the cursor keys ( ) or the roll-key. The step size used by the cursor keys can be specified in the STEP menu, whereby a different step size can be defined for each of the variable parameters.
Page 224: External Keyboard
Mouse and External Keyboard Control DEFAULT The DEFAULT STEP SIZE softkey sets the step size of the active instrument STEP SIZE parameter automatically, i.e. the step size depends on other parameters and is automatically varied whenever these parameters are changed. Example: The step size of the CENTER frequency depends on the selected span.
Page 225: Mouse Control Of Display Elements
Mouse and External Keyboard Control Example: Numeric entry window with mouse control 2.3.9.3 Mouse Control of Display Elements All display and control elements (enhancement labels, softkeys, function labels, display and limit lines, etc.) which are displayed on the instrument’s screen can be controlled with a mouse. Exactly one softkey or hard key is assigned to each display element.
Page 226: General Configuration - System Key Group
Selection of Operating Mode 2.4 General Configuration – SYSTEM Key Group 2.4.1 Selection of the Operating Mode – MODE Key SYSTEM MODE menu: MODE The MODE key opens the menu for setting the measuring mode of the network analyzer (NWA). Some of the modes require the SYSTEM TIME DOMAIN TRANSDUCER...
Page 227: Time Domain Transformation (Option Zvr-B2)
Selection of Operating Mode 2.4.1.1 Time Domain Transformation (Option ZVR-B2) Time domain transformation is used for the display of measured values in the time domain. The data measured in the frequency range are transformed to the time domain using inverse FFT (fast Fourier transform).
Page 228: Switchover Between Frequency And Time Domain
Selection of Operating Mode 2.4.1.1.1 Switchover between Frequency and Time Domain SYSTEM MODE - TIME DOMAIN submenu: The DOMAIN TIME FREQ softkey permits switchover between frequency and time DOMAIN TIME FREQ domain. The frequency domain is the default setting (after PRESET). Switch-on of the time domain is signalled by the enhancement label TIM (short form for TIME).
Page 229 Selection of Operating Mode SYSTEM MODE - TIME DOMAIN - DEF TIME GATE submenu: TIME DOMAIN MODE The DEF TIME GATE softkey opens the submenu for configuring the time domain gate: STEEPEST DOMAIN • The first five softkeys of this submenu serve for changing the EDGES TIME FREQ gate shape.
Page 230 Selection of Operating Mode The STEEP EDGES softkey switches on a gate (R.W. Hamming) with less steep STEEP EDGES edges than the rectangle gate (STEEPEST EDGES). Ringing is considerably reduced as against that of the rectangle gate; the same applies to the height of the sidelobes (43 dB) in the spectrum.
Page 231 Selection of Operating Mode The NORMAL GATE softkey switches on a gate (Julius von Hann) of even flatter NORMAL GATE edges. This gate represents a good compromise between edge steepness and ringing at moderate sidelobe suppression (31 dB). It is recommended for most applications.
Page 232 Selection of Operating Mode The ARBITRARY GATE SHAPE softkey switches on a gate (Dolph-Chebishev) for ARBITRARY GATE SHAPE which the suppression of the sidelobes can be user-selected. Values between 10 dB and 120 dB are permissible. Gates with low sidelobes have a wider main lobe than gates with relatively high sidelobes.
Page 233 Selection of Operating Mode 1043.0009.50 2.104 E-13...
Page 234 Selection of Operating Mode As for all other gates, the optimum solution depends on the specific measurement task. In general, a compromise must be found between either high time resolution or good signal suppression in the time domain, or between either low sidelobes or a narrow main lobe in the frequency domain.
Page 235: Selecting The Transformation Type
Selection of Operating Mode 2.4.1.1.3 Selecting the Transformation Type SYSTEM MODE - TIME DOMAIN - DEF TRANSF TYPE submenu: The DEF TRANSF TYPE softkey opens the submenu where the TIME DOMAIN MODE transformation type can be selected: DOMAIN • With the first three softkeys two types of time-domain TIME FREQ CHIRP transformation (FFT CHIRP), impulse response or step...
Page 236 Selection of Operating Mode The FFT CHIRP softkey toggles between FFT (fast Fourier transform) and chirp CHIRP transformation. The advantage of FFT is that computation is faster than with the CHIRP transformation (by about a factor of 2). However, with FFT all measured values are equidistantly spaced over the ambiguity range (= reciprocal step width of the frequency points) in the time domain.
Page 237: Defining The Frequency Grid
Selection of Operating Mode The IMPULSE STEP softkey toggles between impulse response (IMPULSE) and IMPULSE STEP step response (STEP). • In the first case the response of the DUT to excitation with a short pulse is displayed. This representation is very clear and easy to interpret. •...
Page 238 Selection of Operating Mode Three methods are offered for automatic generation of a harmonic grid from a non-harmonic one. In all cases the number of frequency points ([SWEEP] NUMBER OF POINTS) remains unchanged. 1. The START frequency is changed but the STOP frequency is kept (KEEP STOP FREQ). This yields the following result for Example 2: START = 2 MHz and STOP = 2 GHz.
Page 239 Selection of Operating Mode The KEEP STOP FREQ sets a harmonic frequency grid; the number of frequencies KEEP STOP FREQ and the STOP frequency remain unchanged. To obtain a harmonic grid, the START frequency and thus the frequency step width are suitably modified (as far as possible).
Page 240 Selection of Operating Mode The LOW FIRST SIDELOBE softkey activates a Hamming filter. This filter especially LOW FIRST SIDELOBE suppresses the first sidelobe and is therefore particularly suitable for the detection of closely spaced faults. The NORMAL PROFILE softkey activates the Hann filter also called Hanning. This is NORMAL PROFILE a good compromise between pulse width and sidelobe suppression.
Page 241 Selection of Operating Mode The ARBITRARY SIDELOBES softkey activates a Chebichev filter. In this case the ARBITRARY SIDELOBES sidelobe suppression can be arbitrarily set to values between 10 dB and 120 dB. 1043.0009.50 2.112 E-13...
Page 242: Scaling The Abscissa
Selection of Operating Mode 2.4.1.1.5 Scaling the Abscissa SYSTEM MODE - TIME DOMAIN - DEF TRANSF TYPE submenu: TIME DOMAIN The DEF X-AXIS softkey opens the submenu for scaling the X-AXIS abscissa. Scaling parameters are DOMAIN • delay time (X-AXIS TIME), TIME FREQ •...
Page 243: Positioning The Gate
Selection of Operating Mode The X-AXIS DISTANCE/2 softkey scales the abscissa with respect to half the X-AXIS DISTANCE/2 distance. This is particularly suitable for displaying the distance in the case of reflection measurements. When measuring the reflection (for instance on an open ended cable), the pulse travels through the cable twice before it is received, ie to the end of the cable where it is reflected and then back again.
Page 244: External Measurements
Therefore the entire frequency range of the generator and the receiver (from 10 Hz to 4 GHz for ZVR, ZVRE and ZVRL; from 20 kHz to 8 GHz for ZVC and ZVCE) may be used. The output of the test signal source is switched to the OUTPUT a1 socket, INPUT b1 and INPUT b2 are available for inputs.
Page 245 Selection of Operating Mode MODE INPUTS On a ZVK and ZVM, the INPUTS softkey appears in place of the EXTERNAL softkey provided at least one receiver attenuator is TIME PORT 1 TRANSDUCER DOMAIN INPUT b1 installed. In the INPUTS menu, the user can select for each receiver PREAMP PORT 2 INPUTS...
Page 246: Measurements On Frequency-Converting Duts (Option Zvr-B4)
Selection of Operating Mode 2.4.1.3 Measurements on Frequency-Converting DUTs (Option ZVR-B4) The option ZVR-B4, "Mixer Measurements" enables measurements on frequency-converting components such as mixers or multipliers. SYSTEM MODE - FREQUENCY CONVERS submenu: MODE FREQUENCY The FREQUENCY CONVERS softkey opens the submenu that CONVERS activates, deactivates...
Page 247: Harmonics Measurements
Selection of Operating Mode after activating the frequency-converting mode, the whole range of quantities can be selected with the MEAS key. Even a system-error correction can be activated in the ARBITRARY mode. It is the user who decides whether a selected quantity is useful or not in the current setting. −...
Page 248: Mixer Measurements
Selection of Operating Mode 2.4.1.3.2 Mixer Measurements SYSTEM MODE - FREQUENCY CONVERS submenu: The softkey MIXER MEAS activates the mixer measurement mode. This operating THIRD MIXER MEAS HARMONIC mode is indicated by the enhancement label MIX. This measurement mode can be configured via the DEF MIXER MEAS menu. USER DEF MIXER MEAS...
Page 249 Selection of Operating Mode SYSTEM MODE - FREQUENCY CONVERS - DEF MIXER MEAS submenu: RF = The RF = BASE FREQ, LO = BASE FREQ and IF = BASE FREQ softkeys specify BASE FREQ which one of the three mixer frequencies should serve as a base frequency (see page 2.117).
Page 250 Selection of Operating Mode CONNECTION – Remote control mode of the external source The default mode for all generator types except <NONE> is CONNECTION = GPIB. That means, if the generator is remote-controlled (STATE = REMOTE), the frequency and signal level is set via IEEE-bus before each test point. In addition, some generator types are equipped with the accelerated mode GPIB + TTL.
Page 251 Selection of Operating Mode The SEL BAND softkey selects the band for the third mixer frequency in cases SEL BAND where the sign is ambiguous. The default setting is "-". As soon as two of the three mixer frequencies have been defined by assigning the base frequency (softkeys RF, LO, IF = BASE FREQ) and the fixed frequency (softkeys FIXED RF, LO, IF), the third frequency is given by the formula IF = |RF - LO|.
Page 252: Arbitrary Frequency Conversion
Selection of Operating Mode 2.4.1.3.3 Arbitrary Frequency Conversion SYSTEM MODE - FREQUENCY CONVERS submenu: The ARBITRARY softkey activates the frequency configuration defined via DEF ARBITRARY ARBITRARY. The enhancement label ARB is displayed whenever this operating mode is active. USER ARBITRARY ARBITRARY ARBITRARY SYST FREQ...
Page 253 Selection of Operating Mode In the DEF ARBITRARY menu the base frequency B may be selected outside the limits which usually apply to the network analyzer even when ARBITRARY is active. However, the frequency limits for the internal and external sources and for the receiver must be observed (cf.
Page 254 Selection of Operating Mode System frequency The first column indicates the system frequency. Either the internal source (INT SRC), external sources (EXT SRC) 1 and 2, receiver (RECEIVER) can be configured. ON – on/off switch for the external sources A checkmark indicates the switched-on state. All three sources can be switched on or off.
Page 255: Nonlinear Measurements (Option Zvr-B5)
Selection of Operating Mode 2.4.1.4 Nonlinear Measurements (Option ZVR-B5) SYSTEM MODE - COMPRESS SOI TOI submenu: The COMPRESS SOI TOI softkey opens the menu providing COMPRESS MODE operating modes used to determine quantities describing the nonlinear features of a DUT. These operating modes require the TIME DOMAIN option "Nonlinear Measurements"...
Page 256: Compression Point Measurement
Selection of Operating Mode means of the CHK VALUE SETTINGS softkey in the DEF COMP PNT MEAS and DEF SOI / TOI MEAS menus. The different checks may be activated or deactivated individually. − For nonlinear measurements, one is restricted to the electronically adjustable level range of the internal signal generators.
Page 257 Selection of Operating Mode SYSTEM MODE - COMP SOI TOI - DEF COMP PNT MEAS submenu: The DEF COMP PNT MEAS softkey opens the submenu for COMPRESS DEF COMP SOI TOI PNT MEAS setting parameters which define compression point measurements. SRC POWER MAX LIMIT •...
Page 258 Selection of Operating Mode The SETTLING TIME softkey activates the entry of a delay time which is inserted SETTLING TIME into each single measurement between the setting of the generator and the beginning of data acquisition. Thus it can be guaranteed that a DUT with a large time constant nevertheless has a sufficient settling time.
Page 259 Selection of Operating Mode The following default values are defined: 1. 160 dBm: max power range limit reached (power cal only) If the generator is power-calibrated, the desired level and therefore the input value of SRC POWER MAX LIMIT is no longer restricted to the actual maximum level of the generator, because an additional amplifier might be connected.
Page 260 Selection of Operating Mode The INT SRC, EXT SRC1 and EXT SRC2 softkeys select the signal source used for INT SRC the compression point measurement. The internal source (INT SRC) is selected in the default setting. It is recommended to use an external signal source if the expected compression point is higher than 0 dBm input level of the DUT (7 dBm in the external mode).
Page 261: Measurement Of The
Selection of Operating Mode 2.4.1.4.2 Measurement of the 2 and 3 Order Intercept Point (SOI, TOI) SYSTEM MODE - COMPRESS SOI TOI submenu: The SOI and TOI softkeys switch on the measurement of the 2 and 3 order intercept, respectively, using the parameters set in the DEF SOI MEAS and DEF TOI MEAS menus.
Page 262 Selection of Operating Mode SYSTEM MODE - COMP SOI TOI - DEF SOI MEAS submenu: The DEF SOI MEAS softkey and DEF TOI MEAS open COMPRESS DEF TOI SOI TOI MEAS submenus for the setting of the parameters that define the second and third order intercept measurement.
Page 263 Selection of Operating Mode Note: − In the SRC POWER MAX / MIN LIMIT entry field, the generator powers at the test ports are displayed with the current attenuation of the generator step attenuators taken into account. If power calibration is active for a port, one of the generator power values refers to the reference plane of calibration, the other value is the uncalibrated nominal power of the other port and is marked UNCAL.
Page 264 Selection of Operating Mode The CHK VALUE SETTINGS settings opens the DEFAULT VAL AND CHK CHK VALUE SETTINGS SETTINGS OF SECOND / THIRD ORDER INTERCEPT POINT MEASUREMENT table. The measurement procedure for determining the intercept point involves various plausibility checks which guarantee that the measurement is performed correctly. If one of the check fails, e.g.
Page 265 Selection of Operating Mode 4. 130 dBm: intermodulation product is below noise level at max. source power At each sweep point, the current noise limit for the intermodulation product is determined by switching off one of the two generators and measuring several times at the intermodulation frequency.
Page 266 Selection of Operating Mode If the softkey CHK VALUE SETTINGS is pressed while the intercept measurement is active, the measurement diagram is re-scaled such that the whole range of possible default values is visible. To return to the display of the actually measured values, automatic scaling (RESPONSE SCALE –...
Page 267: Sweep Modes
Selection of Operating Mode 2.4.1.5 Sweep Modes SYSTEM MODE - SWEEP TYPE submenu: MODE SWEEP TYPE The SWEEP TYPE softkey opens the submenu for selecting the sweep variable. Possible sweep variables are sweeping frequency, time and power of the internal signal source. FREQUENCY SWEEP is the default setting.
Page 268 Selection of Operating Mode The TIME SWEEP softkey activates the time sweep operating mode TIME SWEEP The STIMULUS STOP, CENTER and SPAN keys can be used to enter the sweep range. The measurement is started immediately and is repeated cyclically after completion of the time interval.
Page 269: Reference Channel Ports (Option Zvr-B6)
Selection of Operating Mode 2.4.1.6 Reference Channel Ports (Option ZVR-B6) SYSTEM MODE menu: The REFERENCE MIXER softkey activates the reference mixer operating mode. REFERENCE MIXER This requires the reference channel option (ZVR-B6) to be installed. In the reference mixer mode, the reference wave parameter a which is normally routed internally is applied to the a1 EXT OUT socket on the rear panel.
Page 270: Preliminary Setup And Interface Configuration - Setup Key
Configuration 2.4.2 Preliminary Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key SYSTEM SETUP menu: SYSTEM The SETUP key opens the menu for configuration of the SYSTEM SETUP instrument. MODE This menu contains basic configurations measurement hardware applicable in all instrument modes as GENERAL well as the interface configuration and features for setting date SETUP...
Page 271: Programming The Interface Configuration And Time
Configuration 2.4.2.1 Programming the Interface Configuration and Time The GENERAL SETUP soft key branches to a sub-menu in which the basic setup of general instrument parameters may be performed. The current settings are displayed in tabular form on the display screen where they may then be edited.
Page 272: User Port Configuration
Configuration 2.4.2.1.2 User Port Configuration The instrument provides two parallel interfaces, each of which is 8 bits wide. Over these ports, arbitrary bit patterns can be output or input. The interfaces are designated USER PORT A and USER PORT B. SYSTEM SETUP-GENERAL SETUP submenu: The USER PORT A and USER PORT B softkeys activate the columns PORT USER...
Page 273: Serial Interface Configuration
Configuration 2.4.2.1.3 Serial Interface Configuration SYSTEM SETUP-GENERAL SETUP submenu: The COM PORT 1 and COM PORT 2 softkeys activate the columns COM1 PORT 1 and COM2, respectively, for entry of the serial interface parameters. Since the two interfaces are configured in the same manner, how to configure an interface is described in the following using COM PORT 1.
Page 274 Configuration Bits – Number of data bits per word For the transmission of text without German umlauts (Ä, ä, Ü, ü, Ö, ö) and special characters, 7 bits are adequate. For binary data as well as text with special characters or umlauts, 8 bits must be selected (default setting). BITS Parity –...
Page 275 Configuration SW-Handshake – Software handshake protocol Besides the hardware handshake procedure using interface lines, it is also possible to achieve the same effect by using a software handshake protocol. Here, control bytes are transmitted in addition to the normal data bytes. These control bytes can be used, as necessary, to stop data transmission until the receiver is ready to receive data again.
Page 276: Setting Date And Time
Configuration 2.4.2.1.4 Setting Date and Time SYSTEM SETUP-GENERAL SETUP submenu: The TIME softkey activates the entry of time for the internal real-time clock . TIME In the corresponding dialog box, the time is partitioned into two input fields so that hours and minutes can be entered independently. TIME AND DATE Time 21:59...
Page 277: Indication Of The Automatic System Error Calibration
Configuration 2.4.2.1.6 Indication of the Automatic System Error Calibration SYSTEM SETUP-GENERAL SETUP submenu: AUTOKAL The switched-on AUTOKAL CONNECTED softkey indicates to the network CONNECTED analyzer whether the automatic calibration standard for option ZVR-B1, AutoKal, is connected. Option ZVR-B1 and thus AUTOKAL CONNECTED softkey is available for all models except ZVRL, ZVK and ZVM.
Page 278: Enabling Firmware Options
Configuration 2.4.2.3 Enabling Firmware Options SYSTEM SETUP menu: The OPTIONS softkey opens a submenu for entering keywords for new firmware options (Application Firmware Modules). Options which are already available are indicated in a table that is opened when the menu is called. USER OPTIONS OPTIONS...
Page 279: Service Functions
Configuration 2.4.2.4 Service Functions The SERVICE submenu contains a number of service functions that are SERVICE described in detail in the service manual. If not applied properly, these functions may cause malfunctions in the instrument. Therefore they are protected by a keyword which can be entered via the ENTER PASSWORD softkey.
Page 280: Instrument Status And Measurement Parameters - Info Key
Instrument Settings and Measurement Parameters 2.4.3 Instrument Status and Measurement Parameters – INFO Key INFO The INFO key is used to request general information concerning the instrument. These include: INSTRUMENT SYSTEM SETTINGS • the firmware version, MODE • the names of installed hardware options, FIRMWARE VERSIONS •...
Page 281: Hardware Configuration And Options
Instrument Settings and Measurement Parameters 2.4.3.2 Hardware Configuration and Options SYSTEM INFO menu: HARDWARE+ The HARDWARE+OPTIONS softkey opens two tables where the modules OPTION (INSTALLED COMPONENTS) and options (INSTALLED OPTIONS) installed in the instrument are listed. • Similar to the function FIRMWARE VERSIONS, the table MODEL TYPE lists the instrument model and type: MODEL TYPE...
Page 282: System Messages
Instrument Settings and Measurement Parameters FIRMWARE The FIRMWARE OPTIONS softkey opens a table listing the installed OPTIONS firmware options. The FIRMWARE OPTIONS table contains three columns: DESIGNATION name of the firmware option TYPE short type designation CODE enabling code FIRMWARE OPTIONS DESIGNATION TYPE CODE...
Page 283: Fig. 2-26 System Messages
Instrument Settings and Measurement Parameters SYSTEM INFO menu: USER SYSTEM SYSTEM MESSAGES MESSAGES SYSTEM MESSAGES CLEAR MESSAGE MESSAGE COMPONENT DATE/ TIME MESSAGE BUFFER OVERFLOW *********** 24.06.93/ 08:49 CLEAR ALL CLEAR ALL RF OVERRANGE ERROR CONVERTER 24.06.93/ 08:48 MESSAGES MESSAGES SYNTHESIZER TUNING ERROR SYNTHESIZER 24.06.93/ 08:30 CONVERTER ERROR...
Page 284: Measurement Documentation - Copy Key Group
Documentation of Measurement Results Measurement Documentation – COPY Key Group 2.5.1 Printing Data – COPY Key The instrument uses the printer function of Windows NT to output hardcopies. Any printer supported by Windows NT can be used. In addition, the instrument permits data output in the usual data formats WMF, EWMF and BMP which enable hardcopies to be directly inserted into other documents.
Page 285 Documentation of Measurement Results Current print jobs can be aborted only by canceling the entries in the Windows NT printer queue. After starting the print a printer symbol is displayed in the task bar near the time indication. A double-click on this symbol opens a window containing the entries of the printer queue. The relevant print order can be cancelled by marking it with the mouse and pressing the DEL key.
Page 286: Printing Configuration - Setting Key
Documentation of Measurement Results 2.5.2 Printing Configuration – SETTING Key COPY SETTING menu: SETTINGS opens a configuration menu for the SETTINGS SETTINGS COPY output of graphics, parameter lists and test reports to a printer, plotter or in the form of files. COPY SEL ITEMS TO COPY...
Page 287: Selection Of Displayed Elements
Documentation of Measurement Results 2.5.2.1 Selection of Displayed Elements COPY SETTING-SEL ITEMS TO COPY submenu: The SEL ITEMS TO COPY submenu comprises the four SEL ITEMS COPY TO COPY softkeys COPY SCREEN, COPY TRACE, COPY MEM SCREEN TRACE and COPY TABLE. With these softkeys you can COPY select the displayed elements to be printed.
Page 288: Selection Of Data Medium
Documentation of Measurement Results 2.5.2.2 Selection of Data Medium If you have selected a file under HARDCOPY DEVICE, use the softkeys SET PATH A:\ and SET PATH C:\... to select the data medium on which the file is to be stored. When one of the softkeys is activated, the entry field PRINT TO FILE opens.
Page 289: Entry Of Comment Text
Documentation of Measurement Results The UPPER LEFT, LOWER LEFT as well as UPPER RIGHT, LOWER UPPER LEFT RIGHT softkeys select the page quadrants where the printed data will be positioned. In this case, the actual size of the data printed on the page is reduced to 25% of normal size.
Page 290: Color Settings
Documentation of Measurement Results The COMMENT CHANNEL 1, 2, 3 and 4 softkeys open an entry COMMENT CHANNEL 1 field in which a comment of two lines (60 characters per line) can be entered pertinent to the applicable channel. If the user enters more than 60 characters, the excess characters appear on the second line on the print-out.
Page 291: Selection And Configuration Of The Output Device
Documentation of Measurement Results 2.5.2.6 Selection and Configuration of the Output Device The instrument permits two different output devices to be configured. One of the devices is defined as the active device and can be used for hardcopies. The installation and configuration of these output devices is mainly done under Windows NT and is valid for all Windows applications (see Chapter 1, section "Connecting an Output Device").
Page 292 Documentation of Measurement Results Device The selection of the output device/language for DEVICE 1 and DEVICE 2 is made in this line. HARDCOPY DEVICE SETTINGS Device1 WINDOWS METAFILE Print to File DEVICE Orientation CLIPBOARD Device2 CLIPBOARD WINDOWS METAFILE Print to File ENHANCED METAFILE Orientation BITMAP FILE...
Page 293: Selection Of Line Style
Documentation of Measurement Results 2.5.2.7 Selection of Line Style For output to a plotter, different test traces can be assigned different line styles. The test traces of a chart can thus be represented by various types of dotted and dash-dotted lines. The line styles actually printed in the hardcopy depend on the plotter used.
Page 294: Saving And Recalling Data Sets - Memory Key Group
Memory Configuration 2.6 Saving and Recalling Data Sets – MEMORY Key Group The keys in the MEMORY group call the following functions: • Functions for management of storage media (CONFIG). Included are among others functions for listing files, formatting storage media, copying, and deleting/renaming files. •...
Page 295 Memory Configuration Table 2-2 Relationship between file extensions and contents of partial data sets Extension Contents Designation in the table SEL ITEMS TO SAVE/RECALL Configuration data: .SET current settings of the measurement HARDWARE SETTINGS hardware and the related title, if present .LIN data-point tables for the active limit lines LINES...
Page 296: Configuration Of Memory - Config Key
Memory Configuration 2.6.1 Configuration of Memory – CONFIG Key MEMORY CONFIG menu: The CONFIG key opens a menu for managing storage media and files. MEMORY Table DRIVE MANAGEMENT displays the name and label of the storage medium SAVE as well as the available storage area. Table FILE MANAGEMENT displays the files of the current directory and indicates RECALL if any subdirectories are present.
Page 297 Memory Configuration The COPY softkey activates the input of the destination of the copy operation. COPY By entering a predefined disk drive (e.g. C:), a file can also be copied to another storage medium. The files /directories selected by the cursor are copied after the input is confirmed by pressing the ENTER key.
Page 298: Saving Data Sets - Save Key
Saving Data Sets 2.6.2 Saving Data Sets – SAVE Key The SAVE key activates a menu which contains all functions necessary for saving instrument data. • Entry of the name of the data set which should be saved. Confirmation of the entry initiates a save operation to store the data set.
Page 299: Selecting The Data Set For Storage
Saving Data Sets 2.6.2.1 Selecting the Data Set for Storage MEMORY SAVE menu: The EDIT NAME softkey activates the entry of the name of the data set to be saved. EDIT NAME Data entry is concluded by pressing one of the units keys which initiates a save operation to store the data set.
Page 300 Saving Data Sets Note: The current instrument configuration can be easily stored under the name of an existing data set: ½ Press a prefix (unit) key after selecting a data set. The name and the selection of the partial data sets for the currently selected data set will be placed in the SAVE DATA SET table.
Page 301: Selecting The Data Subset For Storage
Saving Data Sets 2.6.2.2 Selecting the Data Subset for Storage The SEL ITEMS TO SAVE softkey opens a submenu and the table ITEMS TO SAVE for selecting a subset of the current data set to be stored. MEMORY SAVE-SELECT ITEMS TO SAVE submenu: USER SEL ITEMS TO SAVE...
Page 302: Configuration Of Ascii Files
Recalling Data Sets 2.6.2.3 Configuration of ASCII Files MEMORY SAVE - ASCII FILE submenu: ASCII ASCII FILE FILE The ASCII FILES softkey opens a DISPLAYED ASCII submenu used define ASCII DATA FILE characteristics of the ASCII file to be created. MATH Touchstone Any ASCII output file can be configured.
Page 303 Recalling Data Sets If the SUPER COMPACT softkey is selected, the ASCII data are stored in a format SUPER  COMPACT compatible with the applications of CAE supplier Ansoft • If a reflection factor S or a non-normalized Z or Y is measured on when the data is saved, a one-port .FLP file is created.
Page 304 Recalling Data Sets The DEC SEP softkey selects the decimal separator for ASCII files. The separator DEC SEP . DEC SEP , must be selected according to the requirements of the application the ASCII file is intended for. The default setting depends on the language for an external keyboard selected in the SETUP - GENERAL SETUP menu (see section 2.4.2.1.4, External Keyboard Configuration).
Page 305 Recalling Data Sets The following diagram shows on which stages in the processing of measured values it is possible to extract data: Stages during data processing Extracted data Recording measurement data System error Receiver power correction correction Conversion COMPLEX CONVERS Time domain transformation TIME DOMAIN...
Page 306: Recalling Data Sets - Recall Key
Recalling Data Sets 2.6.3 Recalling Data Sets – RECALL Key The RECALL key activates a menu which contains all functions necessary for recalling data sets. • Entry of the name of the data set which should be recalled. Confirmation of the entry initiates a load operation to recall the data set.
Page 307: Selecting The Data Set To Be Recalled
Recalling Data Sets MEMORY RECALL menu: USER MEMORY MEMORY MEMORY SAVE SAVE SAVE EDIT AUTO NAME RECALL RECALL RECALL DATA SET EDIT PATH NAME: DATASET1 PATH: \USER\SETTINGS ITEMS: DEFAULT CONFIG Radio Monitoring SET PATH COMMENT: EDIT NAME DATASET1_ SET PATH C:\...
Page 308 Recalling Data Sets The SET PATH A:\ softkey determines that the data set is called from drive A SET PATH (floppy disk). The name of the drive is included in the RECALL DATA SET table. The SET PATH C:\... softkey determines that the data set is called from drive C SET PATH C:\...
Page 309: Selecting Data Subsets To Be Recalled
Recalling Data Sets The DATA SET LIST column displays all data sets present in the selected directory. The CONTENTS and COMMENT lines in the AUTO RECALL CONTENTS column indicate the saved partial data sets and the comment for the currently selected data set.
Page 310 Recalling Data Sets The ITEMS TO RECALL selection table lists the partial data sets available: General Setup current configuration of general instrument parameters HW-Settings current measurement hardware settings Trace1...4 measurement data trace 1 to trace 4 Lines data point tables for the active limit lines Cal Data calibration data Cal Kit Data...
Page 311: Switchover To Manual Operation And Default Setup - Status Group
Change to Manual Operation Switchover to Manual Operation and Default Setup – STATUS Group 2.7.1 Switchover to Manual Operation – LOCAL Key The STATUS group comprises the SRQ and REMOTE LEDs and the LOCAL key. STATUS é The SRQ LED indicates that the instrument has raised a service request on the IEC/IEEE bus.
Page 312: Default Setup - Preset Key
Currently measured data (not linked to stored data) System error correction Switched off Offset Start frequency 9 kHz (ZVR, ZVRE, ZVRL with passive bridges) 300 kHz (ZVR, ZVRE, ZVRL with active bridges) 20 kHz (ZVC, ZVCE) 10 MHz (ZVK, ZVM)
Page 313 Default Setup Parameter Setting Center frequency As appropriate Sweep width As appropriate Sweep mode Frequency sweep Scale of measured values Linear Number of test points Trigger mode Free-running Sweep direction Forward Sweep Enabled Parameters to be coupled Coupled Sweep Automatic, continuous Output level -10 dBm Rise of output level...
Page 314: Macros - User Key
Macros Macros – USER Key The menus of the network analyzer are so designed that the analyzer can be easily applied to most of the usual measurement tasks with a minimum number of key operations. However, the USER menu also permits a tailored adaptation of any necessary setup and measurement functions needed for special applications.
Page 315: Starting Macros
Macros 2.8.2 Starting Macros USER menu USER MENU The USER key opens a menu for selection and starting of macros. USER The macros can be defined in the DEFINE MACRO submenu. (MACRO 1) (MACRO 2) FIRST LINE (MACRO 3) LAST LINE (MACRO 4) DELETE (MACRO 5)
Page 316: Defining Macros
Macros 2.8.3 Defining Macros The DEFINE MACRO menu contains all of the softkeys which are needed for macro management. Included are functions for starting and ending macro programming, editing of a macro title, etc. USER DEFINE MACRO menu DEFINE The DEFINE MACRO softkey calls the sub-menu to define the MACRO macros.
Page 317 Macros The DEFINE PAUSE softkey inserts a pause instruction into the macro DEFINE PAUSE sequence which is being recorded. A running macro will pause when it reaches this instruction, at which point settings on the unit under test could for example be made.
Page 318: Defining The Sweep Range - Stimulus Key Group
Defining the Sweep Range Defining the Sweep Range – STIMULUS Key Group (START, STOP, CENTER and SPAN Keys) The STIMULUS key group comprises the START, STOP, CENTER and SPAN STIMULUS keys. These keys activate the entry of the limits and size of the sweep range. START STOP The selection of the sweep variable is made in the SYSTEM MODE - SWEEP...
Page 319 Defining the Sweep Range deriving these system frequencies from a base frequency using a formula. This base frequency is entered via the STIMULUS START / STOP or CENTER / SPAN keys. For scaling the sweep axis of the measurement diagram, it is possible to select the base frequency and also one of the configured system frequencies.
Page 320: Sweep Setup - Sweep Key Group
Sweep Variables 2.10 Sweep Setup – SWEEP Key Group The SWEEP key group comprises the SWEEP, RESTART, SOURCE and AVG keys. These keys define the sweep mode in detail. • The SWEEP key opens a menu setting parameters for the sweep in the SWEEP active display channel.
Page 321: Single Point Measurement
Sweep Variables SWEEP SWEEP menu: SWEEP SWEEP SWEEP SINGLE SWEEP DIR POINT SWEEP RESTART SWEEP LIN SWEEP START HOLD CONTINUOUS SOURCE LOG SWEEP SWEEP NUMBER OF SEG SWEEP SWEEPS DEF SWEEP SINGLE SEGMENTS SWEEP NUMBER OF POINTS TRIGGER SWEEP TIME AUTO EDIT SWEEP TIME...
Page 322: Defining The Grid
Sweep Variables 2.10.1.2 Defining the grid SWEEP SWEEP menu: The LIN SWEEP softkey sets a grid with constant step size. This is the default LIN SWEEP setting. The grid depends on the sweep range and the number of points specified in the NUMBER OF POINTS menu.
Page 323: Fig. 2-33 Editing The Segment List
Sweep Variables The DEF SWEEP SEGMENTS softkey opens a submenu for editing the sweep list. This list allows to divide the sweep range into up to 40 individual segments each of which can be interpreted as an independent sweep range with individual setting of the most important generator and receiver parameters.
Page 324 Sweep Variables When DEF SEGMENT LIST is called, the SWEEP SEGMENTS table is displayed which gives an overview of the current definition of the segments in the sweep range. The table contains the segment number plus 8 columns which can be edited: SEGM –...
Page 325 Sweep Variables AUTO Selecting the AUTO field sets the sweep time automatically to the minimum value. 200 ms A sweep time can be edited manually in the numeric field. The TIME field can be edited only if the current segment does not overlap any other segment.
Page 326 Sweep Variables LO1 – Frequency of first local oscillator referred to the measurement frequency The column LO1 is used to select whether the frequency of the first local oscillator (LO of the first mixer stage in the receiver) is set to a value which is higher (+) or lower (-) than the measurement frequency.
Page 327 Sweep Variables The DIVIDED X AXIS softkey causes the x-axis of Cartesian diagrams to be divided DIVIDED X AXIS into as many sections of the same width as there are segments defined in the list. The x-axis is scaled linearly or logarithmically in all sections according to the setting via the X GRID LIN LOG softkey.
Page 328: Defining The Number Of Points
Sweep Variables 2.10.1.3 Defining the Number of Points SWEEP SWEEP – NUMBER OF POINTS submenu: SWEEP NUMBER OF The NUMBER OF POINTS softkey opens a submenu defining POINTS the number of sweep points. SINGLE ARBITRARY This is possible for linear (LIN SWEEP) or logarithmic (LOG POINT SWEEP) grids but not when a segment list (SEG SWEEP) is used.
Page 329: Setting The Trigger Mode
Sweep Variables The STEP SIZE softkey activates the entry of the step size of the sweep variables STEP SIZE between two points. This softkey is enabled only if LIN SWEEP is active. If the current width of the sweep range divided by the entered step size is no integer ratio, the distance between the last and the last but one point is set smaller than the required step size.
Page 330 Sweep Variables SWEEP SWEEP – DEF TRIGGER submenu: SWEEP TRIGGER TRIGGER SINGLE FREE RUN POINT SLOPE EXTERNAL LIN SWEEP LINE LOG SWEEP PERIODIC EDIT TIMER SEG SWEEP TIMER PERIOD REAL TIME EDIT RTC DEF SWEEP CLOCK TRIG TIME SEGMENTS NUMBER OF MANUAL POINTS MANUAL...
Page 331 Sweep Variables The REAL TIME CLOCK softkey defines the real-time clock as trigger signal. The REAL TIME CLOCK enhancement label TRG RTC is displayed. If REAL TIME CLOCK is activated, the trigger point can be entered via the EDIT RTC TRIG TIME softkey (see below). The MANUAL softkey switches on manual triggering.
Page 332: Automatic Or Manual Setting Of The Sweep Time
Sweep Variables The EDIT RTC TRIG TIME softkey activates the entry of a trigger point which is EDIT RTC TRIG TIME related to the internal real time clock. RTC TRIGGER TIME 15 h 30 min SYSTEM CLOCK: 12:23:56 2.10.1.5 Automatic or Manual Setting of the Sweep Time SWEEP SWEEP menu: The SWEEP TIME AUTO /MAN softkey defines the setting of the sweep time in the SWEEP TIME...
Page 333: Coupling Of Display Channels
Sweep Variables 2.10.1.6 Coupling of Display Channels The NWA provides four independent display channels selected via the CH1, ... , CH4 keys in the CHANNEL group. The setting parameters for these channels can be subdivided into three categories: • Global parameters are always identical for all of the 4 display channels. These are the IEC-bus addresses, attenuation setting, triggering and the settings selected via the RESPONSE DISPLAY key.
Page 334: Miscellaneous Settings
Sweep Variables 2.10.1.7 Miscellaneous Settings SWEEP SWEEP menu: The SWEEP DIR FWD/REV softkey reverses the sweep direction. The forward SWEEP DIR direction is the default setting (FWD position). Reversing the sweep direction is particularly suitable in the low-frequency range. Since devices under test may have very long settling times in the AF range, the low- frequency phase shift caused by the start of a new forward sweep may lead to considerable measurement errors.
Page 335: 2Starting A New Sweep - Restart Key
Starting a New Sweep 2.10.2 Starting a New Sweep – RESTART Key The RESTART key aborts the currently active sweep and starts a new one at SWEEP the start value. SWEEP RESTART At the same time, the averaging procedure is initialized, i.e., the current average at a point is replaced by the first new measured value (see AVG - AVERAGE RESTART).
Page 336: 3Setting Fixed Sweep Parameters - Source Key
Fixed Sweep Parameters 2.10.3 Setting Fixed Sweep Parameters – SOURCE Key The SOURCE key opens a menu setting the fixed parameters of the sweep. • The main menu and (on ZVK and ZVM) the left supplementary menu contain internal settings. •...
Page 337 Fixed Sweep Parameters The POWER softkey allows to vary the power of the internal signal source POWER electronically. The following applies to models ZVRx and ZVCx: • In the internal operating mode (SYSTEM MODE - EXTERNAL - EXTERNAL softkey disabled) without option ZVR-B10, the indicated level refers to PORT 1 and PORT 2.
Page 338 For the function of this softkey, refer to CAL a1 POWER. (only ZVR, ZVRL, ZVC, ZVK, ZVM and ZVRE/ZVCE with option ZVR-B10) STEP ATT The STEP ATT a1 softkey activates the entry of an attenuation value for the attenuator connected to the signal path of the wave a1 propagating towards the DUT.
Page 339 Fixed Sweep Parameters (only ZVR, ZVC, ZVK, ZVM and ZVRE/ZVCE with option ZVR-B10) STEP ATT The STEP ATT a1 softkey activates the entry of an attenuation value for the attenuator connected to the signal path of the wave a2 propagating towards the DUT.
Page 340 Fixed Sweep Parameters The CAL EXT SRC1 POWER softkey sets the level of the external signal source 1 if CAL EXT SRC1 POWER a level correction of this source is active. CAL EXT SRC1 POWER can be operated only if the generator level correction for the external source 1 is switched off.
Page 341: 4Setting The Averaging Function And The Receiver Bandwidth - Avg Key
Averaging / Reveiver Bandwidth 2.10.4 Setting the Averaging Function and the Receiver Bandwidth – AVG Key The averaging algorithm can be interpreted as an implementation of a single-stage recursive digital filter. Similar to the IF filter, this filter reduces the noise level and thus increased the dynamic range of the measurement.
Page 342 Averaging / Receiver Bandwidth The AVG FACTOR softkey activates the entry of the averaging factor. AVG FACTOR If the AVG TYPE SWEEP POINT softkey (see below) is active, the averaging factor represents the number of values measured at one point and averaged with equal weight.
Page 343 Averaging / Reveiver Bandwidth SWEEP AVG – IF BANDWIDTH submenu: The IF BANDWIDTH softkey calls the submenu for setting the BANDWIDTH bandwidth of the digital receiver filter on the intermediate frequency. AVERAGE 1 Hz • The bandwidth can be set between 1 Hz and 10 kHz in 1-3-10 steps.
Page 344: The Marker Functions - Marker Key Group
Main Markers 2.11 The Marker Functions – MARKER Key Group The Marker key group comprises the MARKER, SEARCH, DELTA, and = MKR keys and provides marker functions. These are tools for specifying points in diagrams, for numerically reading out a converted and formatted measured value and for quickly setting the display range.
Page 345 Main Markers marker field in the information line ∆ 1: 23.345 dB 23.76 ° 456.345 MHz ∆ 2: 45.45 dB 11.12 ° 470.450 MHz ∆ 3: -12.99 dB 1.15 ° marker info list 652.198 MHz ∆ 4: -4.456 dB 5.45 ° 689.256 MHz Markers are always located within the sweep range.
Page 346: Switching On And Moving Markers
Main Markers MARKER MARKER menu: MARKER MARKER MARKER MARKER MARKER MARKER 1 MARKER 5 MARKER SEARCH MARKER 2 MARKER 6 DELTA = MKR MARKER 3 MARKER 7 MARKER 4 MARKER 8 MARKER DATA COUPLED MARKER MARKERS CONT DISCR MARKER CONVERS MARKER FORMAT MARKER...
Page 347: Conversion Of The Marker Value
Main Markers The MARKER DATA MEM softkey places the active marker either on the trace MARKER DATA (DATA) or on the memory trace of the active display channel (MEM). The stimulus value of the marker remains unchanged. The softkey can only be operated when two traces are displayed in the sweep range.
Page 348: Format Of The Marker Value
Main Markers The S softkey causes the marker values to be read out in a non-converted form. The 1/S softkey inverts the marker values. The Z softkey converts the marker values into impedances. The value entered via the softkey MEAS - COMPLEX CONVERS - SET Z0 (Y0 = 1/Z0) is used as reference impedance.
Page 349 Main Markers MARKER MARKER - MARKER FORMAT submenu: MARKER MARKER MARKER MARKER FORMAT FORMAT MARKER 1 MAGNITUDE MARKER 2 MAGNITUDE MARKER 3 PHASE ELEMENTS MARKER 4 REAL MARKER IMAGINARY DATA COUPLED MARKERS MARKER GROUP CONVERS DELAY MARKER LIN MAG FORMAT AND PHASE MARKER dB MAG...
Page 350 Main Markers The IMAGINARY softkey displays the imaginary component of the marker value. IMAGINARY The SWR softkey formats the marker values as standing-wave ratios (SWR). If single wave quantities are measured or if the marker conversion "impedance" or "admittance" is active, the SWR formatting may not be selected. The GROUP DELAY softkey displays the marker value as a group delay.
Page 351: Info List And Interpolation
Main Markers 2.11.1.4 Info list and Interpolation MARKER MARKER menu: The MARKER INFO softkey switches the marker info list in the active display MARKER INFO channel on and off. If the list is switched off, only the response values of the active marker are shown. The MARKER CONT DISCR softkey selects between continuous (interpolation MARKER CONT...
Page 352: 2Marker Search Functions - Search Key
Search Functions 2.11.2 Marker Search Functions – SEARCH Key The MARKER SEARCH key opens a menu for positioning a marker to significant points on the trace (e.g. maximum, minimum etc.). The marker search functions can be triggered once manually or automatically with each sweep (TRACKING).
Page 353 Search Functions The SEARCH NEXT softkey starts the search for local extreme values. SEARCH NEXT If the MAX MODE softkey is on, the function searches for the next smallest local maximum in the sweep range, starting at the measured value at the actual marker position.
Page 354 Search Functions MARKER SEARCH - DEFINE B’DFILTER submenu: The DEFINE B’DFILTER softkey opens a submenu that is used MARKER DEFINE to define the target of the bandfilter search. SEARCH B’DFILTER This comprises the determination of SEARCH SEARCH • the position of a band-pass or band-stop filter (BANDPASS / BANDSTOP), SEARCH BANDPASS...
Page 355 Search Functions The WIDTH softkey selects the bandwidth as search target. WIDTH The instrument searches for an extremum and for bandwidth points at which the measured values have changed by a specific user-defined amount compared to the extremum (e.g. when determining the 3-dB bandwidth). After the search has been triggered using the softkeys SEARCH ←...
Page 356: 3Delta Markers - Delta Key
Delta Markers 2.11.3 Delta Markers – DELTA Key Delta markers are used to determine the difference of the stimulus and response values of markers to a so-called reference marker. The DELTA key opens a menu offering the following options: • One of the eight markers is defined to be the reference marker ( ∆ REF = MARKER 1, ..., 8). •...
Page 357 Delta Markers The ∆ REF = MARKER 1 softkey defines the marker 1 of the active display channel ∆ REF = MARKER 1 as a reference marker. All other enabled markers in the active channel become delta markers. Markers 1 to 4 can be defined as reference markers in the main menu, the softkeys for the ∆...
Page 358: 4Marker Assignment Functions - = Mkr Key
= Marker Menu 2.11.4 Marker Assignment Functions – = MKR Key MARKER = MKR menu: The = MKR key opens a menu where the stimulus or measured values of the last active marker or delta marker are assigned to specific parameters. The following parameters may be defined: •...
Page 359 = Marker Menu The SPAN = MARKER softkey sets span equal to the width of the range between the SPAN = MARKER active delta marker and the reference marker. This function is only available in the delta mode. The MAX = MARKER softkey sets the maximum value of the diagram equal to the = MARKER measured value of the active marker.
Page 360: Display And Limit Lines - Lines Key Group
Display Lines 2.12 Display and Limit Lines – LINES Key Group The LINES key group comprises the LINES and LIMITS keys. These keys LINES provide auxiliary lines which make the evaluation of the trace easier. • The LINES key provides display lines for measuring absolute values and LINES LIMITS differences on the trace.
Page 361 Display Lines The ENTRY LINE1 LINE2 softkey defines which of the two display lines is affected ENTRY LINE1 LINE2 by the operating functions of the LINES menu. The default setting is LINE1. The COMPLEX MAGN PHASE softkey defines which kind of display lines are used COMPLEX MAGN PHASE in circle diagrams.
Page 362: 2Limit Lines - Limits Key
Limit Lines 2.12.2 Limit Lines – LIMITS Key Limit lines can be used in Cartesian or circle diagrams in order to check whether the parameters of a DUT adhere to defined limits. A typical application is the check for adherence to specifications. If the limit check is activated, •...
Page 363: Selecting And Switching On Limit Lines
Limit Lines 2.12.2.1 Selecting and Switching On Limit Lines The SELECT LINE softkey switches on and off the SELECT LINE table. By default, the softkey is not active and the table is not displayed. SELECT LINE USER LIMITS SELECT LINE EDIT NAME COPY LINE DEFINE...
Page 364 Limit Lines SWEEP – (only for TYPE = SECTIONS) associated grid FORMAT – (only for TYPE = SECTIONS) associated formatting of measured value DIAGR – (only for TYPE = SECTIONS) associated division of the x-axis COMPATIBLE – Indication of compatibility A checkmark in this column indicates that the setting parameters of the limit line are compatible with the current setting, i.e., the table columns TYPE to DIAGR comply with the current instrument settings.
Page 365: Defining A Limit Line In A Circular Diagram
Limit Lines 2.12.2.2 Defining a Limit Line in a Circular Diagram LINES LIMITS submenu: DEFINE The DEFINE CIRCLE softkey calls a submenu for definition of a LIMITS CIRCLE limit line in a circular diagram. SELECT CENTER X In this type of diagram, limit lines are tolerance circles whose LINE center and radius can be freely defined.
Page 366 Limit Lines The RADIUS softkey activates the entry of the radius of the tolerance circle in dia- RADIUS gram units. The ACCEPT POSITION softkey takes the position of the graphic editing utility as ACCEPT POSITION center of the tolerance circle. As long as one of the two softkeys USE CURSOR or USE MARKER is active, the graphic editing utility is either a cursor in the form of a cross or a marker which is labeled with an "8".
Page 367: Defining A Limit Line In A Cartesian Diagram
Limit Lines 2.12.2.3 Defining a Limit Line in a Cartesian Diagram The DEFINE SECTIONS softkey opens a menu defining the characteristic of the currently active limit line in a Cartesian diagram. In this type of diagram, limit lines consist of a maximum of 20 sections. Each section is specified by two pairs of reference points, located at the x-coordinates START and STOP, and defining each an upper and lower limit in the y-direction.
Page 368 Limit Lines DEFINE SECTIONS USER DEFINE SECTIONS DEL ALL SECTIONS DEL ACTIVE SECTION INS NEW SECTION GOTO SECTION # ACCEPT POSITION USE CURSOR USE MARKER UPPER LIM LOWER LIM LINE SECTIONS SECT START UPPER LIM LOWER LIM STOP UPPER LIM LOWER LIM MIDDLE VAL DELTA LIM...
Page 369 Limit Lines The DEL ALL SECTIONS softkey deletes all sections in the line sections table. DEL ALL SECTIONS Prior to deletion, a request to confirm the action is displayed. The DEL ACTIVE SECTION softkey deletes the active section. DEL ACTIVE SECTION The active section is where the cursor is positioned within the table.
Page 370 Limit Lines The USE MARKER softkey switches on a temporary marker which is displayed as USE MARKER graphic editing utility and labeled by the number 8. Its default position is the begin- ning of the sweep. Similar to other markers the temporary marker can be positioned over the associ- ated entry field, however, it can not be operated like a regular marker via the MARKER key group.
Page 371: Moving A Limit Line
Limit Lines 2.12.2.4 Moving a Limit Line LINES LIMITS - MOVE LINE submenu: LIMITS MOVE LINE The MOVE LINE softkey opens a submenu which allows for moving limit lines. SELECT USE MARKER • The circle or tolerance band may be centered with reference LINE to a point of the trace with a temporary marker (MIDDLE = MIDDLE...
Page 372 Limit Lines The CENTER = MARKER. softkey centers the active limit line interpreted as a toler- CENTER = MARKER ance circle on the position of the temporary marker. The X OFFSET softkey activates the entry of an offset in the x-direction for the active X OFFSET limit line.
Page 373: Display And Limit Check
Limit Lines 2.12.2.5 Display and Limit Check LINES LIMITS menu: The SHOW LINE softkey switches on and off the display of the active limit line. SHOW LINE A line may only be switched on when it is compatible with the current diagram (see the COMPATIBLE field in the SELECT LINE table).
Page 374: Selection Of Display Channel - Channel Group
For models with bidirectional test set, the S parameters are assigned to the keys CH1 to ZVR, CH4 such that the arrangement of the keys corresponds to the position of the four ZVRE S parameters in the scattering matrix. Because the S parameter S is assigned to chan- ZVC, nel 2, the CH2 key is located in the lower left portion of the key group.
Page 375 Selection of Display Channel The CH1 key selects channel 1 as the active display channel and switches the CHANNEL LED above the key on. Assignment in the default setting: , COMPLEX formatting The CH2 key selects channel 2 as the active display channel and switches the CHANNEL LED above the key on.
Page 376: Configuring Of Measured-Value Display - Response Key Group
Selection of the Measured Quantity 2.14 Configuring of Measured-Value Display – RESPONSE Key Group The RESPONSE key group comprises the MEAS, FORMAT, SCALE, DIAGRAM, DISPLAY and TRACE keys. They are used to define the display of measured values. • The MEAS key selects the measured quantity in the active display RESPONSE channel, MEAS...
Page 377: Measurement Of S-Parameters
Selection of the Measured Quantity Notes: The system-error correction can only be applied to the measurement of S parameters and quantities derived from them such as Z and Y parameters If S-parameters and wave quantities or ratios are measured at the same time, the display channels cannot be coupled (the SWEEP SWEEP - COUPLED CHANNELS softkey is switched off).
Page 378 Selection of the Measured Quantity The S12 TRANS REV softkey selects the reverse transmission coefficient S TRANS REV measured quantity. is measured as transmission from PORT 2 to PORT 1 and is defined as the ratio of the wave amplitudes b and a Only for the ZVR and ZVC families: In the external mode, S is particularly useful if...
Page 379 Selection of the Measured Quantity USER DEF´D The USER DEF´D S-PARAMS softkey opens the table USER DEFINED S-PARAMS S PARAMETERS. This table is used to re-define S-parameters, thus allowing them to be adapted to an external test setup. The main application of user-defined S-parameters unidirectional measurement of two independent transmission or reflection parameters at the same...
Page 380 Selection of the Measured Quantity The table USER DEFINED S-PARAMETERS contains the S- parameters to be defined and also two editable columns: S-PARAM – S-Parameters NUMERATOR – Numerator with which the S-parameter is formed DENOMINATOR – Denominator with which the S-parameter is formed The current setting is marked by a tick and is active for the measurement.
Page 381: Measuring Wave Quantities
Selection of the Measured Quantity 2.14.1.2 Measuring Wave Quantities The WAVE QUANTITY softkey calls a submenu that allows receiver input signals to be selected directly as measured quantities, i.e. without any prior formation of quotients. The input signals are referred to as waves a1, b1, b2, a2 in the WAVE QUANTITY submenu. Their assignment to the physical connectors of the unit is different for the internal and the external mode.
Page 382 Selection of the Measured Quantity The SELECT UNIT softkey calls the table of the same name, where physical units SELECT UNIT for single waves can be defined. The units W and V can be selected for a linear trace in a linear grid or for a logarithmic trace in a logarithmic grid (RESPONSE DIAGRAM - LIN CARTESIAN and LOG CARTESIAN).
Page 383 Selection of the Measured Quantity The a2 softkey selects the wave amplitude a as measured quantity. This is the outgoing wave at PORT 2. The a2 softkey is not provided on ZVRL. In the case of the ZVR and ZVC families, it is operative only in the internal mode.
Page 384 Selection of the Measured Quantity 2.14.1.3 Measuring Ratios of Wave Quantities RESPONSE MEAS - RATIO Submenu: MEAS RATIO The RATIO softkey opens a submenu that selects ratios of the wave amplitudes received by the network analyzer as measured DEFINE quantities. REFL PORT1 RATIO For a description which wave amplitudes are available see below...
Page 385 Selection of the Measured Quantity DEFINE RATIO NUMERATOR DENOMINATOR not ZVRL |a1| |a1| |a2| |a2| not ZVRL CONV GAIN The CONV GAIN b1/Pa1 softkey displays the conversion gain for the wave b1. b1/Pa1 In frequency-converting measurements, S parameters are not defined. Since the receiver is usually set to the frequency converted by the DUT and, as a result, the reference signal cannot be measured at the input frequency of the DUT, the conversion gain used instead is the ratio of the measured receive signal (here the...
Page 386 Selection of the Measured Quantity The b2/a2 softkey selects the ratio of the wave amplitudes b and a as measured b2/a2 quantity. This softkey is not available on ZVRL. In the case of the ZVR and ZVC families, it is not operative in the external mode.
Page 387: Measurement Of Two-Port Z Or Y Parameters
Selection of the Measured Quantity 2.14.1.4 Measurement of Two-Port Z or Y Parameters RESPONSE MEAS – Z- AND Y-PARAMS submenu: MEAS Z- AND Y- Z- AND Y- Z AND Y PARAMS softkey opens a PARAMS PARAMS submenu measuring two-port Y11/Y0 REFL PORT1 Y parameters.
Page 388 Selection of the Measured Quantity The Y12 softkey selects the reverse transadmittance Y as a parameter. The Y22 softkey selects the output admittance Y as a parameter. SET Z0 The SET Z0 (Y0 = 1/Z0) softkey activates the entry for reference impedance Z (Y0 = 1/Z0) Reference impedance Z is required to calculate two-port Z and Y parameters from...
Page 389 Selection of the Measured Quantity The Z11/Z0 softkey selects the normalized input impedance Z as a measured Z11/Z0 quantity. The Z21/Z0 softkey selects the normalized forward transimpedance Z as a Z21/Z0 measured quantity. The Z12/Z0 softkey selects the normalized reverse transimpedance Z as a Z12/Z0 measured quantity.
Page 390: Converting The Measured Quantity
Selection of the Measured Quantity 2.14.1.5 Converting the Measured Quantity Conversion means that an S parameter is converted into another complex quantity. It must not be mistaken for formatting, where a complex quantity is mapped to a scalar one. RESPONSE MEAS - COMPLEX CONVERS Submenu: The COMPLEX CONVERS opens the submenu for selecting the COMPLEX MEAS...
Page 391 Selection of the Measured Quantity The 1/S softkey inverts the selected S parameter. This is useful in stability measurements, for example. When 1/S is selected, the FORMAT - MAGNITUDE formatting with associated default diagram is set. The SET Z0 (Y0 = 1/Z0) softkey activates the entry of a reference impedance Z SET Z0 (Y0 = 1/Z0) Reference impedance Z...
Page 392: Measurement Of Stability Factors
Selection of the Measured Quantity 2.14.1.6 Measurement of Stability Factors Three parameters are available to assess the stability of linear two-ports such as amplifiers. They are derived by conversion from the S parameters of the DUT and are represented as a function of frequency or of another stimulus quantity.
Page 393: Measuring Dc Voltage
Selection of the Measured Quantity 2.14.1.7 Measuring DC Voltage The DC MEAS INPUTS group on the rear of the instrument comprises BNC connectors DC 1 and DC 2. These are floating inputs for measuring DC voltages between –10 V and +10 V. The measuring diagram displays the voltage versus the selected sweep variable (frequency, time, generator power).
Page 394: 2Formatting Of The Measured Quantity - Format Key
Formatting of the Measured Quantity 2.14.2 Formatting of the Measured Quantity – FORMAT Key The FORMAT key opens a menu which defines in which form the complex measured quantity selected with the MEAS key is displayed. • A complex quantity can be directly represented in a circular diagram (COMPLEX). •...
Page 395 Formatting of the Measured Quantity FORMAT FORMAT RESPONSE COMPLEX MEAS FORMAT SCALE MAGNITUDE PHASE PHASE DIAGRAM DISPLAY TRACE UNWRAP REAL IMAGINARY PHASE DELAY ELECTRICAL LENGTH GROUP MECHANICAL DELAY LENGTH STEP APERTURE FREQUENCY SET DI- ELECTRIC APERTURE The COMPLEX softkey displays the result in a complex format. COMPLEX The result is displayed directly in a circular diagram.
Page 396 Formatting of the Measured Quantity The IMAGINARY softkey displays the imaginary part of the current measured IMAGINARY quantity. The IMAGINARY format cannot be selected for the measurement of single wave quantities. The SWR softkey calculates the standing wave ratio (SWR) from the measured quantity.
Page 397 Formatting of the Measured Quantity Since no measurements are made outside the set sweep range, the aperture is reduced to about half of its value at the limits of the range. In the above example, the value obtained at the first sweep point would be determined from the phases of points 1 and 3.
Page 398 Formatting of the Measured Quantity The PHASE UNWRAP softkey cancels the limitation of the range to ±180° in the PHASE UNWRAP scalar phase representation (PHASE softkey is on). No more steps will occur and the phase may assume any value. However, at the start of the sweep, the phase value will always be between +180°...
Page 399 Formatting of the Measured Quantity The MECHANICAL LENGTH softkey calculates the mechanical length l of the MECHANICAL elφ LENGTH DUT and displays it in the marker-info field (entry ML:). MECHANICAL LENGTH differs from ELECTRICAL LENGTH only in that not the vacuum light velocity is assumed for electromagnetic wave propagation but a lower speed, the latter resulting from the use of a dielectric: τ...
Page 400 Formatting of the Measured Quantity The EDIT DIELECTRIC softkey calls the EDIT DIELECTRIC table that is EDIT DI- ELECTRIC superimposed on table SET DIELECTRIC and is used for editing the name and parameters of the selected dielectric. The following relationship exists between the second and the third column: ELOCITY FACT = EPSILON Either of the two fields can be edited.
Page 401: 3Scaling Of The Test Diagram - Scale Key
Scaling of the Test Diagram 2.14.3 Scaling of the Test Diagram – SCALE Key SCALE The SCALE key opens a menu scaling the test diagram in the active display channel. RESPONSE • Scaling can be automatic or manual AUTOSCALE (AUTOSCALE). MEAS FORMAT SCALE...
Page 402 Scaling of the Test Diagram RESPONSE SCALE menu: The AUTOSCALE softkey automatically re-scales the y or radial axis. AUTOSCALE As a result, all values measured in the current sweep are really displayed on screen. The range of values is determined during the sweep run in which AUTOSCALE is pressed.
Page 403 Scaling of the Test Diagram The MAX VALUE softkey activates the entry of the maximum value on the y or radial MAX VALUE axis. If fixed axis division is active, switchover is made to flexible division. The conventions set forth in the introduction to this section apply. For logarithmic Cartesian diagrams (DIAGRAM - LOG CARTESIAN active), MAX VALUE must be positive.
Page 404 Scaling of the Test Diagram RESPONSE SCALE - ZOOM Submenu: SCALE ZOOM The ZOOM softkey opens a submenu where any segment of the test diagram in the active display channel can be magnified. • In Cartesian diagrams, the center position (CENTER X, AUTOSCALE CENTER X CENTER Y) and the width (SIZE X) and height (SIZE Y) of the...
Page 405 Scaling of the Test Diagram The SIZE Y softkey activates the entry of the height of the rectangular section frame SIZE Y as a percentage of the diagram height. The softkey operates only in Cartesian diagrams. The RADIUS softkey activates the entry of the radius of the circular section frame as RADIUS a percentage of the diagram radius.
Page 406: 4Selection Of The Test Diagram - Diagram Key
Selection of the Test Diagram 2.14.4 Selection of the Test Diagram – DIAGRAM Key The DIAGRAM key opens a menu where the diagram for the display of measured values can be selected. In addition to the default diagram set automatically when the formatting for an active display channel is defined (see FORMAT key), a number of other diagram types is available.
Page 407 Selection of the Test Diagram The LIN CARTESIAN softkey displays the non-logarithmic measured quantity in a CARTESIAN Cartesian diagram with linear y-axis division. The number and position of the division lines depend on the selected scaling (see SCALE menu). LIN CARTESIAN can be selected only with scalar formatting. The LOG CARTESIAN softkey displays the logarithmic measured quantity in a CARTESIAN Cartesian diagram with logarithmic y-axis division.
Page 408: Defining The Cartesian Segmentation Of The Y Axis
Selection of the Test Diagram 2.14.4.1 Defining the Cartesian Segmentation of the y Axis RESPONSE DIAGRAM - DEF CART SEGMENTS submenu: The DEF CART SEGMENTS softkey opens a submenu which subdivides the y-axis of a Cartesian diagram into up to three segments. By segmentation of the y axis, the ranges of a measured quantity that are of particular interest can be examined more closely using a scaling with a high resolution, while other ranges, in which an overview of the trace is sufficient, are...
Page 409 Selection of the Test Diagram DEF CART SEGMENTS USER DEF CART SEGMENTS DEL ALL SEGMENTS DEL ACTIVE SEGMENT INS NEW SEGMENT GOTO SEGMENT # Y GRID Y SEGMENTS Y GRID SEGMENT MIN VALUE MAX VALUE Y GRID 1 (UPPER) -1 dB 0 dB 2 (MIDDLE) -10 dB -1 dB...
Page 410 Selection of the Test Diagram The DEL ALL SEGMENTS softkey deletes all segments from the table. DEL ALL SEGMENTS Prior to this, a dialogue window appears that prompts the user to confirm deletion. The DEL ACTIVE SEGMENT softkey deletes the active segment. DEL ACTIVE SEGMENT The active segment is the segment of the line in which the editing bar is positioned.
Page 411 Selection of the Test Diagram RESPONSE DIAGRAM menu: The GRID ANNOTATION switches the labeling in Cartesian diagrams on or off. As a GRID ANNOTATION default setting, the labeling is switched on. The function is valid only for the diagram of the active display channel. The GRID softkey switches on or off the grid of the diagram of the active display GRID channel.
Page 412: Defining The Polar Radial Segmentation
Selection of the Test Diagram 2.14.4.2 Defining the Polar Radial Segmentation RESPONSE DIAGRAM - DEF POLAR SEGMENTS Submenu: The explanations given for DEF CART SEGMENTS in the main menu (section DEF POLAR SEGMENTS 2.14.1.1) apply analogously to softkey DEF POLAR SEGMENTS in the lateral menu, therefore no detailed description is given here.
Page 413 Selection of the Test Diagram RESPONSE DIAGRAM menu: The SMITH softkey displays a Smith chart if complex formatting of the measured- SMITH value is active. In this diagram type, the Cartesian grid of the complex impedance plane (Z plane) is projected onto the reflection-coefficient plane.
Page 414: 5Configuration Of The Screen - Display Key
Configuration of the Screen 2.14.5 Configuration of the Screen – DISPLAY Key The DISPLAY key opens a menu configuring the DISPLAY whole screen. RESPONSE SINGLE The settings made under this key have a global CHANNEL effect, whereas the settings made under the other MEAS FORMAT SCALE...
Page 415: Expansion Of Diagrams To Maximum Screen Format
Configuration of the Screen The DUAL CHAN SPLIT softkey superimposes the diagrams of the active display DUAL CHAN SPLIT channel and its adjacent channel. It differs from DUAL CHAN OVERLAY only in that the diagrams of the two channels are displayed separately. The odd-numbered channel is shown in the upper, the even-numbered channel in the lower half of the screen.
Page 416: Configuring The Graphic Elements Of The Display
Configuration of the Screen 2.14.5.3 Configuring the Graphic Elements of the Display RESPONSE DISPLAY - CONFIG DISPLAY submenu The CONFIG DISPLAY softkey calls a menu which sets the characteristics of the graphic elements of the display. These include • the colors of the graphic elements(COLORS), •...
Page 417: Fig. 2-38 Setting The Screen Colors
Configuration of the Screen COLORS USER COLORS SELECT OBJECT TINT SELECT OBJECT BRIGHTNESS CHANNEL 1: DATA AND MATH TRACE CHANNEL 2: DATA AND MATH TRACE SATURATION CHANNEL 3: DATA AND MATH TRACE CHANNEL 4: DATA AND MATH TRACE MEMORY TRACE TRACE LIMIT FAIL DEFAULT MARKER...
Page 418 Configuration of the Screen The SET COLOR softkey calls a table containing predefined colors which can be COLOR assigned to the graphic element selected in the SELECT OBJECT table. COLORS BLACK BLUE BROWN GREEN CYAN MAGENTA YELLOW WHITE DARK GRAY LIGHT GRAY LIGHT BLUE LIGHT GREEN...
Page 419 Configuration of the Screen The X POSITION softkey activates the entry of the x-axis position of the left edge of X POSITION the selection table as a percentage of the diagram width. The Y POSITION softkey activates the entry of the y-axis position of the upper edge Y POSITION of the selection table as a percentage of the diagram height.
Page 420 Configuration of the Screen The TITLE softkey switches the header line on and off, i.e. the uppermost line of the TITLE screen. Entries into this line are made by means of EDIT TITLE. The line can be switched on only if it is not empty. The EDIT TITLE softkey activates the input field for editing the header line.
Page 421: 6Operations With Traces - Trace Key
Operations with Traces 2.14.6 Operations with Traces – TRACE Key The TRACE key opens a menu for storing and mathematically manipulating measured traces. • Up to eight traces can be stored (DATA TO MEMORY). • The current measured data of a channel can be displayed directly (SHOW DATA), mathematically linked with the data of another channel (SHOW MATH) or with stored data (SHOW MEM) before they are output.
Page 422 Operations with Traces The SHOW DATA softkey displays the current measured data directly, i.e. they are SHOW DATA not linked mathematically with any other data. The softkey can be activated only alternatively to SHOW MATH, i.e. only one trace obtained from current measured data can be output per display channel. The SHOW MEM softkey displays the contents of the memory selected in the right- SHOW MEM hand menu as a static trace in addition to the current measured data, provided the...
Page 423 Operations with Traces The MATH DATA/MEM softkey divides the current measured data by the stored MATH DATA/MEM data. MATH DATA/MEM is the default setting. Note: Normalization of the measured data to the stored data by is performed by MATH DATA/MEM in a logarithmic representation (e.
Page 424 Operations with Traces The STIMULUS OFFSET softkey is used to shift traces stored in memories MEM 1 STIMULUS OFFSET to MEM 8 by positive or negative offsets with respect to the stimulus axis. This makes it possible to compare traces from different frequency ranges. All sweep modes (frequency, power, time) are supported.
Page 425 Operations with Traces The DEFINE MATH softkey calls a table of the same name. The table allows to DEFINE MATH define a mathematical term consisting of max. three operands linked by means of basic arithmetic operations. The mathematical operation defined by means of a softkey is preset (eg MATH = DATA/MEM).
Page 426 Operations with Traces While editing an operator in table DEFINE MATH, the table OPERATOR X is displayed (X stands for the number of the operator): OPERATOR 1 FINISHED If FINISHED is selected, the term is reduced to the part left of the operator field in question, i.e.
Page 427: Correction Of System Errors - Cal Key Group
System Error Calibration 2.15 Correction of System Errors – CAL Key Group The CAL key group comprises the keys CAL and OFFSET and is used to correct systematic errors. • The CAL key allows to determine and correct system errors. •...
Page 428 System Error Calibration 2.15.1.1 System Error Calibration The first six softkeys of the CAL CAL menu (START NEW CAL, ... , MODIFY CAL KIT) perform a system error calibration. The enhancement label CAL indicates that the system-error correction is switched on. If the correction values are interpolated. If the correction values are interpolated over the sweep variable, the CAI label is displayed.
Page 429: System Error Calibration
System Error Calibration 2.15.1.1.1 Performing a System-Error Calibration CAL-CAL START NEW CAL submenu: The START NEW CAL softkey starts the system-error calibration. START NEW CAL The softkey calls a chain of submenus which leads back to the main menu of the CAL key after a completed calibration. FULL START ZVRL...
Page 430: A)Specification Of The Connectors At The Test Ports
System Error Calibration Specification of the Connectors at the Test Ports The PORT 1 CONNECTOR menu is called if the calibration procedure selected requires the characteristics of the standards connected to test port 1 to be known. This applies to the full two-port calibration, the full one-port calibration at port 1 and at both ports as well as for the unidirectional calibration in forward direction.
Page 431 System Error Calibration The N 50 Ω MALE softkey declares the test port to be a connector of the connector N 50 Ω family N 50 Ω. MALE The N 75 Ω FEMALE softkey declares the test port to be a socket of the connector N 75 Ω...
Page 432: B)System-Error Calibration Procedure
System Error Calibration The PORT 2 CONNECTOR menu, which is not available on ZVRL, is analogous to the PORT 1 CONNECTOR menu. This menu is called if the properties of the standard connected to test port 2 are needed for the calibration mode selected. •...
Page 433 System Error Calibration lower frequency limit of 2 GHz. If the sweep range includes lower frequencies, the broadband termination must be measured additionally. Broadband termination and sliding load can be measured in arbitrary order. However, the measurement results of the sliding load have a higher priority than those of the broadband termination.
Page 434: Full Two-Port Calibration (Zvr, Zvc, Zvk And Zvm)
Full Two-port Calibration 2.15.1.1.2 Full Two-port Calibration (ZVR, ZVC, ZVK and ZVM) The calibration mode "full two-port calibration" can only be carried out in the internal mode, since it requires conversion of the test-signal direction. For procedures which use an unknown reflection standard (REFLECT), it is necessary that the electrical characteristics of the reflection standards are identical when both test ports are measured.
Page 435 Full Two-port Calibration CAL CAL - START NEW CAL - FULL TWO PORT - TOM CAL MEAS submenu: FULL TWO PORT CAL MEAS CAL MEAS ..THROUGH OPEN PORT 1 OPEN PORT 2 SLIDE MATCH PORT 1 PORT 1 SLIDE MATCH PORT 2 PORT 2...
Page 436: B)Trm Calibration Procedure
Full Two-port Calibration The APPLY CAL softkey terminates the measurement of the calibration standard APPLY CAL and initiates calculation of the correction data. This softkey can be activated only, if the required standards have been measured at least one time. If the implicit verification detects an error, the user is asked whether to continue the calibration or not.
Page 437 Full Two-port Calibration The THROUGH softkey starts the measurement of the through-connection between THROUGH test ports 1 and 2. The REFLECT PORT 1 softkey starts the measurement of the unknown one-port REFLECT PORT 1 standard at test port 1. The REFLECT PORT 2 softkey starts the measurement of the unknown one-port REFLECT PORT 2 standard at test port 2.
Page 438: C)Trl Calibration Procedure
Full Two-port Calibration TRL Calibration Procedure The TRL softkey selects the THROUGH-REFLECT-LINE calibration procedure. A through-connection (THROUGH) which is as free of attenuation and reflection as possible, any unknown reflecting one-port standard (REFLECT) which must show the same electrical characteristics at both ports, and a line (LINE) which is as free of reflection and attenuation as possible are required as standards.
Page 439 Full Two-port Calibration The REFLECT PORT 2 softkey starts the measurement of the unknown one-port REFLECT PORT 2 standard at test port 2. The LINE 1 softkey starts the measurement of line 1 between the test ports 1 and 2. LINE 1 The frequency range of this measurement is limited by the condition that the phase difference between the transmission coefficients of line 1 and the through-connection...
Page 440: D)Tna Calibration Procedure
Full Two-port Calibration TNA calibration procedure The TNA softkey selects the THROUGH-NETWORK-ATTENUATION calibration procedure. This procedure requires two-port standards, only. Apart from the THROUGH which should be as free of reflection and attenuation as possible, an attenuation standard (ATTENUATION) is to be measured which must be matched on both sides but which may provide any transmission coefficient.
Page 441 Full Two-port Calibration The ATTEN softkey starts the measurement of the matched attenuation standard ATTEN between the test ports 1 and 2. The APPLY CAL softkey terminates the measurement of the calibration standard APPLY CAL and initiates calculation of the correction data. This softkey can be activated only, if the required standards have been measured at least one time.
Page 442 Full Two-port Calibration The THROUGH softkey starts the measurement of the through-connection between THROUGH the test ports 1 and 2. The OPEN PORT 1 softkey starts the measurement of the open circuit at test port 1. OPEN PORT 1 The OPEN PORT 2 softkey starts the measurement of the open circuit at test port 2. OPEN PORT 2 The SHORT PORT 1 softkey starts the measurement of the short circuit at test port...
Page 443: F)Tom-X Calibration Procedure
Full Two-port Calibration The MATCH BOTH PORTS softkey starts the measurement of crosstalk between MATCH BOTH PORTS the test ports, whereby terminators must be fastened to both ports. This softkey can only be activated when ISOLATION is in the YES state. TOM-X calibration procedure The TOM-X softkey selects the THROUGH-OPEN-MATCH calibration procedure which has been extended to 15 error terms (complete model).
Page 444: G)Autokal Fundamental Calibration
Full Two-port Calibration The MATCH BOTH PORTS softkey starts the measurement of matched MATCH BOTH PORTS terminations. The latter must be connected to the test ports simultaneously. The OPEN BOTH PORTS softkey starts the measurement of the open circuits. OPEN BOTH PORTS The latter must be connected to the test ports simultaneously.
Page 445 Full Two-port Calibration CAL CAL - START NEW CAL - FULL TWO PORT - AUTOKAL FUNDAM’TAL submenu: FUNDAM´TAL FUNDAM´TAL FULL CAL MEAS CAL MEAS TWO PORT ..THROUGH OPEN PORT 1 OPEN PORT 2 MATCH SLIDE TOSM PORT 1 PORT 1 MATCH SLIDE PORT 2...
Page 446: Full Two-Port Calibration (Zvre, Zvce)
Full Two-port Calibration 2.15.1.1.3 Full two-port calibration (ZVRE, ZVCE) CAL CAL - START NEW CAL - FULL TWO PORT submenu: START FULL The FULL TWO PORT softkey selects the complete two-port NEW CAL TWO PORT calibration mode. FULL Full two-port calibration can only be carried out in the internal TWO PORT mode, since it requires conversion of the test-signal direction.
Page 447 Full Two-port Calibration TOSM calibration The TOSM softkey selects the THROUGH-OPEN-SHORT-MATCH calibration which is also known as SOLT or 12-term calibration. (Please note that the L in SOLT stands for LOAD = MATCH and not for LINE.) Apart from a matched, no-loss through-connection (THROUGH), this procedure requires the one-port standards OPEN, SHORT and a matched termination (MATCH), which are each connected to both test ports.
Page 448 Full Two-port Calibration The SHORT PORT 1 softkey starts the measurement of the short circuit at test port SHORT PORT 1 The SHORT PORT 2 softkey starts the measurement of the short circuit at test port SHORT PORT 2 The MATCH PORT 1 softkey starts the measurement of the matched termination at MATCH PORT 1 test port 1.
Page 449: B)Autokal Fundamental Calibration
Full Two-port Calibration AutoKal Fundamental Calibration CAL CAL - START NEW CAL - FULL TWO PORT submenu: The AUTOKAL FUNDAM´TAL softkey calls the calibration test menu for a AUTOKAL FUNDAM´TAL fundamental calibration of the AutoKal procedure. The AutoKal procedure can only be used together with the option ZVR-B1 (AutoKal add-on module).
Page 450 Full Two-port Calibration The AutoKal add-on module can be used in two different ways. Either measurement ports PORT 1 and PORT 2 on the AutoKal add-on module assume the function of the analyzer measurement ports (i.e. the add-on module remains connected after transfer calibration), or the add-on module is connected for calibration only and then removed.
Page 451 Full Two-port Calibration CONFIG AUTOKAL USER CONFIG AUTOKAL DISCONNECT AFTER CAL ACTIVE AUTOKAL UNIT DATA SET LINE 1 (MF) LINE 1 (MF) NAME DISCONN NAME DISCONN LINE 2 (MM) LINE 2 (MM) ALLOWED ALLOWED LINE 2 (FF) <LAST AKF> LINE 2 (FF) <NONE>...
Page 452 Full Two-port Calibration The DISCONNECT AFTER CAL softkey defines the position of the reference plane DISCONNECT AFTER CAL after the AutoKal transfer calibration. When DISCONNCECT AFTER CAL is in the OFF state, the reference plane of the transfer calibration is the same as the plane of the allocated fundamental calibration. If, on the other hand, the softkey is ON, the system-error correction data is calculated during transfer calibration so that they refer to a disconnection plane between the network analyzer and the AutoKal add-on module.
Page 453 Full One-port Calibration 2.15.1.1.5 Full One-port Calibration (ZVR, ZVRE; ZVC, ZVCE, ZVK, ZVM) CAL CAL - START NEW CAL - FULL ONE PORT submenu: START FULL The FULL ONE PORT softkey opens a menu to define the full NEW CAL ONE PORT one-port calibration.
Page 454 Full One-port Calibration CAL CAL - START NEW CAL - FULL ONE PORT - BOTH PORTS submenu: FULL ONE PORT ONE PORT ONE PORT CAL MEAS CAL MEAS OPEN ..BOTH PORTS PORT 1 SHORT PORT 1 SLIDE MATCH PORT 1 PORT 1 PORT 1 PORT 2...
Page 455 Full One-port Calibration The MATCH PORT 2 softkey starts the measurement of the matched termination at MATCH PORT 2 test port 2. The APPLY CAL softkey terminates the measurement of the calibration standard APPLY CAL and initiates calculation of the correction data. This softkey can be activated only, if the required standards have been measured at least one time.
Page 456: Full One-Port Calibration (Zvrl)
Full One-port Calibration 2.15.1.1.6 Full One-port Calibration (ZVRL) The FULL ONE PORT softkey starts the complete one-port calibration measurement. This calibration mode can be performed at test port 1 only. Subsequent to selection of the test port connector the ONE PORT CAL MEAS menu is displayed. The OPEN, SHORT and MATCH standards have to be connected to the test port.
Page 457 For special features of the sliding-load measurement, see section 2.15.1.1.1, part b). 2.15.1.1.7 Unidirect. Two-port Calibration (ZVR, ZVRE, ZVC,ZVCE, ZVK, ZVM) The ONE PATH TWO PORT menu is selected to start unidirectional calibration measurements. This type of calibration is particularly appropriate for two-port measurements in external mode, which does not allow for two-port calibration.
Page 458 Unidirectional Two-port Calibration The FORWARD softkey starts the unidirectional two-port calibration in forward FORWARD direction. It consists of full one-port calibration at test port 1 (for S ) and a transmission calibration from port 1 to port 2 for (S The REVERSE softkey starts the unidirectional two-port calibration in reverse REVERSE direction.
Page 459 Unidirectional Two-port Calibration The OPEN PORT 1 softkey starts the measurement of the open circuit at test OPEN PORT 1 port 1. The SHORT PORT 1 softkey starts the measurement of the short circuit at test SHORT PORT 1 port 1. The MATCH PORT 1 softkey starts the measurement of the matched termination at MATCH PORT 1...
Page 460: Unidirectional Two-Port Calibration (Zvrl)
Unidirectional Two-port Calibration 2.15.1.1.8 Unidirectional Two-port Calibration (ZVRL) The ONE PATH TWO PORT softkey starts the calibration for unidirectional two-port measurements, the best calibration procedure possible for the ZVRL. It consists of a full one-port calibration measurement at port 1 (for S , in the external mode, this requires, e.
Page 461: Autokal Fundamental Calibration (Zvrl)
Unidirectional Two-port Calibration The SHORT PORT 1 softkey starts the measurement of the short circuit at test SHORT PORT 1 port 1. The MATCH PORT 1 softkey starts the measurement of the matched termination at MATCH PORT 1 test port 1. The THROUGH softkey starts the measurement of the through-connection between THROUGH the test ports 1 and 2.
Page 462: A)Transmission Normalization
Normalization Calibration 2.15.1.1.10 Normalization Calibration (ZVR, ZVRE, ZVC, ZVCE, ZVK, ZVM) A normalization is the simplest form of system-error calibration since it requires the measurement of only one standard for each of the S-parameters to be calibrated. The value measured for a given DUT at a given test point is divided by the measured value of the calibration standard at the same test point, i.e., the measurement is normalized.
Page 463: B)Reflection Normalization
Normalization Calibration The APPLY CAL softkey terminates the measurement of the calibration standard APPLY CAL and initiates calculation of the correction data. This softkey can be activated only, if the required standards have at least been measured one time. Reflection Normalization CAL CAL - START NEW CAL - REFL NORM submenu: START REFL NORM...
Page 464 Normalization Calibration CAL CAL - START NEW CAL - REFL NORM - REFL NORM CAL MEAS submenu: REFL NORM REFL NORM The PORT 1, PORT 2 and BOTH PORTS softkeys open the CAL MEAS corresponding submenus performing reflection normalization at test port 1, test port 2 or at both test ports. BOTH PORTS OPEN PORT 1...
Page 465: C)Combined Transmission And Reflection Normalization
Normalization Calibration Combined Transmission and Reflection Normalization CAL CAL - START NEW CAL - TRANS AND REFL NORM submenu: START TRANS AND The TRANS AND REFL NORM softkey opens a menu for NEW CAL REFL NORM selecting a combined normalization calibration for transmission FULL and reflection measurements.
Page 466 Normalization Calibration CAL CAL - START NEW CAL - TRANS AND REFL NORM - TR NORM CAL MEAS submenu: TRANS AND TR NORM The TWO PORT NORM, TRANS FWD REFL P1 and TRANS REFL NORM CAL MEAS REV REFL P2 softkeys open submenus for performing a combined as a bi-directional or unidirectional calibration in forward or reverse direction.
Page 467: 1.11Normalization Calibration (Zvrl)
Normalization Calibration 2.15.1.1.11 Normalization Calibration (ZVRL) A normalization is the simplest form of system-error calibration since it requires the measurement of only one standard for each of the S-parameters to be calibrated. The value measured for a given DUT at a given test point is divided by the measured value of the calibration standard at the same test point, i.e., the measurement is normalized.
Page 468: B)Reflection Normalization
Normalization Calibration Reflection Normalization START REFL NORM The REFL NORM softkey directly calls the menu for reflection NEW CAL CAL MEAS normalization at test port 1. In the external mode, a reflection normalization can be performed (e. g. at an external reflection coefficient bridge) as well. The definition of S must be adapted before to the external test setup START...
Page 469: C)Combined Transmission And Reflection Normalization
Normalization Calibration Combined Transmission and Reflection Normalization CAL CAL - START NEW CAL - TRANS AND REFL NORM submenu: START TR NORM The TRANS AND REFL NORM softkey calls the menu for NEW CAL CAL MEAS combined transmission and reflection normalization. A reflection normalization is performed at test port 1 (for S ), a transmission normalization from port 1 to port 2 (for S...
Page 470: Auxiliary Functions For System Error Calibration
System Error Calibration 2.15.1.2 Auxiliary Functions for System Error Calibration CAL CAL menu: The softkey REPEAT PREV CAL repeats the calibration which corresponds to the REPEAT PREV CAL system-error correction data of the active display channel. The calibration test menu is displayed without any additional entries being made. The operating mode and sweep settings which are associated with the correction data set are restored when the calibration is started.
Page 471 System Error Calibration The CAL INTERPOL softkey interpolates the correction data between the test points INTERPOL of the calibration run. The enhancement label CAI indicates calibration with interpolation (UNCAL is switched off and CAL INTERPOL is switched on). Interpolation allows a system error correction even if the test points of the current sweep do not coincide with the points of the current calibration.
Page 472: Characteristics Of Calibration Standards
Characteristics of Calibration Standards 2.15.1.3 Characteristics of Calibration Standards The MODIFY CAL KIT softkey opens a menu for the management of calibration kits for the individual connector families. Exact knowledge of the calibration standards is a prerequisite for a accurate system-error calibration. More precisely, the calibration is based on the knowledge of those S-parameters of the standards which are assumed to be known for the applied calibration method.
Page 473: Fig. 2-40 Selecting The Connector Families
Characteristics of Calibration Standards CAL CAL - CAL KITS submenu: CAL KITS USER CAL KITS Ω STANDARDS ACTIVE N 50 CONNECTOR STANDARD TYPE TYPE THROUGH (MM) ZV-Z21 ACTIVATE THROUGH (FF) ZV-Z21 ZV-Z21 THROUGH (MF) LINE 1 (MM) MODIFY STANDARDS LINE 1 (FF) LINE 1 (MF) ZV-Z26 VIEW...
Page 474 The following types of standards are provided for the various types of network analyzers. Due to the restricted calibration facilities of the ZVRE, ZVCE and ZVRL compared to the ZVR, ZVC, ZVK and ZVM, a reduced set of standards is required only.
Page 475 Characteristics of Calibration Standards CAL CAL - MODIFY CAL KIT - SELECT KIT submenu: The CONNECTOR TYPE softkey calls a menu for selecting the CAL KITS CONNECTOR TYPE connector family shown in the ACTIVE XX STANDARDS table. CONNECTOR Ν 50 Ω The type and order of the connectors shown in this menu are TYPE different for the different models of the ZVx family.
Page 476 Characteristics of Calibration Standards The SEXLESS USR CONN 1 softkey displays the table ACTIVE USER CONN 1 SEXLESS USR CONN 1 STANDARDS. The connector family SEXLESS USR CONN 1 which can be user- defined is not polarized (similar to PC 7) and particularly suited for non-coaxial cable systems such as microstrip.
Page 477: Fig. 2-41 Modifying The Standards
Characteristics of Calibration Standards Fig. 2-41 Modifying the standards The MODIFY STANDARDS softkey calls the MODIFY XX YY STANDARDS table. In the four quadrants of this table, the parameters of the four individual standards of a single type are displayed. The type is selected in the ACTIVE XX STANDARDS table.
Page 478 Characteristics of Calibration Standards An asterisk (*) as the last character of the kit name indicates that the preset values or the values installed from floppy of one or several parameters of the corresponding individual standard were changed. If an attempt is made to enter a calibration kit name which is already present twice (e.g.
Page 479 Characteristics of Calibration Standards C0... C3 – polynomial coefficients for parasitic capacitance For OPEN, as well as for REFLECT and SYMMETRIC NETWORK with APPROX = OPEN selected, the parasitic capacitance at the open end of the line can be described by a third-order frequency polynomial. C0 denotes the constant part, C1 to C3 the polynomial coefficients of the corresponding powers of the frequency.
Page 480 Characteristics of Calibration Standards The CREATE INST FILE softkey creates an installation file for a calibration kit. This CREATE INST FILE function is useful, e.g., if an updated installation file for the entire calibration kit is needed after exchange of an individual calibration standard, or if calibration kit data entered via MODIFY STANDARDS are to be transferred to other instruments.
Page 481 Characteristics of Calibration Standards The INSTALL NEW KIT softkey allows one to install calibration kits from a floppy INSTALL NEW KIT disk or another storage medium. If a floppy containing a single calibration kit file (this applies to all floppies provided with the calibration kits from Rohde &...
Page 482 Characteristics of Calibration Standards The connector families SEXLESS USR CONN 1 and USR CONN 2 can also be WAVEGUIDE configured for waveguide calibration by means of the WAVEGUIDE softkey. If this softkey is activated, the instrument takes into account the nonlinear relationship between the phase of the S-parameters and the frequency, which prevails in waveguides.
Page 483 Characteristics of Calibration Standards The USER CONN NAME softkey activates the entry of a name comprising up to 11 USER CONN NAME characters for the connector families SEXLESS USR CONN 1 and USR CONN 2. The name refers to the family selected in the CONNECTOR TYPE menu. In the title of the tables ACTIVE XX STANDARDS, MODIFY XX YY STANDARDS and ACTIVE XX YY, it replaces the character string XX.
Page 484: Power Calibration (Option Zvr-B7)
Power Calibration 2.15.1.4 Power Calibration (Option ZVR-B7) When measuring ratios formed from wave parameters, such as S-parameters, the absolute value of the generator level cancels out. For other test parameters such as compression and intercept points, it is, however, important to know the absolute generator and receive levels at the ports. Corresponding to those levels, the ZVR allows to perform either a generator or a receiver power calibration.
Page 485 Power Calibration Power correction If the desired value is changed after a generator power calibration and if the with an offset: calibration is not repeated, the correction values are referred to this new value, ie the offset between the original and the new desired value is taken into account. The same holds •...
Page 486 Power Calibration Power correction Similar to the generator power correction, also the receiver power correction with an offset: takes into account an offset if the receiver attenuator setting is changed. Note: The level uncertainty after a generator power calibration basically depends on the measurement uncertainty of the power meter as well as on multiple reflections caused by a possible generator...
Page 487 Power Calibration CAL CAL - START NEW POWER CAL submenu: START NEW START NEW POWER CAL POWER CAL CAL EXT CAL a1 START SRC1 POWER POWER NEW CAL REPEAT DEF SRC 1 CAL a2 ZVRL PREV CAL POWER PCAL SWEEP RESUME CAL b1 CAL EXT...
Page 488 Power Calibration The START NEW POWER CAL menu contains the following functions: • Using a generator calibration for the outgoing waves, one of the wave parameters a or a can be corrected to a frequency constant level at an arbitrary reference plane (CAL a1 POWER and CAL a2 POWER, the latter softkey not for ZVRL).
Page 489 Power Calibration If the test point grid is changed, the correction values are interpolated over the Validity of frequency provided the new frequency points lie inside the calibrated range. If correction data: not, the power calibration is switched off. The correction values for the fixed frequency in the level or time sweep are also interpolated, if possible.
Page 490 Power Calibration Power calibration Power calibration is possible in a segmented frequency-point grid (SWEEP and segmented SWEEP – DEF SWEEP SEGMENTS or SEG SWEEP) and can be active. Note sweep: the following: The nominal value of a generator-power calibration is also entered via CAL CAL –...
Page 491 Power Calibration 7. Only if the frequency-converting measurement is to be performed in the MIXER or ARBITRARY mode: Configuration of the frequency-converting measurement (SYSTEM MODE – FREQUENCY CONVERS – DEF MIXER MEAS / DEF ARBITRARY) 8. Activation of the frequency-converting measurement (SYSTEM MODE – FREQUENCY CONVERS –...
Page 492 Power Calibration CAL CAL - START NEW POWER CAL submenu: The CAL a1 POWER softkey selects power calibration of the wave parameter a CAL a1 POWER This comprises a generator power calibration of the internal source and – if SRC PCAL EACH SWEEP is switched off –...
Page 493 Power Calibration The CAL b1 POWER softkey selects receiver power calibration of the wave CAL b1 POWER parameter b A generator with a known level is required. If wave quantity b is received via test PORT 1, a serves as a known reference wave. However, if b is received via INPUT b1 socket (ie external mode set on ZVRx and UVCx or INPUT b1 activated on ZVK/ZVM), a1 is used.
Page 494 Power Calibration The POWER MTR CONFIG softkey calls a table for configuration of the power POWER MTR CONFIG meter. Power meters NRVS, NRVD and NRV from Rohde & Schwarz as well as 437 B and 438 A from Hewlett-Packard are supported. POWER METER CONFIG SENSOR CAL FACTOR TYPE...
Page 495: Fig. 2-42 Entry Of A Frequency-Dependent Calibration Factor
Power Calibration SENSOR CAL FACTOR USER SENSOR CAL FACTOR DEL ALL POINTS DEL ACTIVE POINT INS NEW POINT CAL FACTOR LIST OF SENSOR A GOTO LABEL SER# 1234567 POINT # POINT FREQUENCY CAL FACTOR 100 kHz 98.5% 1 MHz 99.0% 10 MHz 98.5% SENSOR...
Page 496 Power Calibration The SENSOR CAL FACTOR softkey calls a submenu for entry of the frequency- dependent calibration factor for the power sensor used. Due to mismatch, losses and changes in sensitivity of the power sensor, the power measurement is subject to frequency-dependent errors. The calibration factor of a sensor describes which percentage of the power transmitted to the sensor is actually detected and indicated by the test instrument.
Page 497 Power Calibration A name for the selected power sensor (A or B) of up to 12 characters can be entered SENSOR LABEL via the SENSOR LABEL softkey . This name is displayed in the second line of the calibration-factor list. The USE SENSOR A B softkey is used to switch between the calibration factors of USE SENSOR power sensors A and B.
Page 498 Power Calibration The DEF SRC 1 PCAL SWEEP softkey calls the table SRC 1 POWER CAL SWEEP DEF SRC 1 PCAL SWEEP used to define the frequency points for the generator power calibration of the external source 1. SRC 1 POWER CAL SWEEP START 10 MHz STOP...
Page 499 Power Calibration The EDIT POWER LOSS LIST softkey calls a submenu for entering the frequency- dependent loss between the reference plane and the power test point. Up to 20 interpolation points can be entered into the POWER LOSS LIST table. The entries are sorted in ascending order of the frequencies.
Page 500: 2Entry Of Offset Parameters - Offset Key
Power Calibration The DEL ACTIVE POINT softkey deletes the active interpolation point, ie the one DEL ACTIVE POINT which the cursor of the loss list is positioned to. The INS NEW POINT softkey inserts a new interpolation point following the active INS NEW POINT interpolation point.
Page 501 Power Calibration OFFSET The OFFSET menu comprises the following functions • All offset parameters can be reset to 0 (RESET OFFSETS). RESET OFFSETS • The entered value is valid for one of the two test ports (PORT1/PO RT2) . PORT1PORT2 •...
Page 502 Power Calibration The MECHANICAL LENGTH softkey activates the entry of a length offset for the MECHANICAL LENGTH selected test port as mechanical length. The entry value is coupled with that of softkeys DELAY TIME and ELECTRICAL LENGTH. The mechanical length is interpreted as a piece of conductor with a dielectric the permittivity ε...
Page 503 Test and Measurement Division Operating Manual VECTOR NETWORK ANALYZER ZVR / ZVRE / ZVRL 1127.8551.61/.62 1127.8551.51/.52 1127.8551.41 ZVC / ZVCE 1127.8600.60/.61/.62 1127.8600.50/.51/.52 1127.8500.60 1127.8651.60 Volume 2 Operating Manual consists of 2 volumes Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany 1127.8700.12-03-...
Page 505: Annex C: List Of Commands
Tabbed Divider Overview Volume 1 Volume 2 Contents Contents Index Index Data Sheet Supplements Safety Instructions Safety Instructions Certificate of Quality Certificate of Quality EC-Certificate of Conformity EC-Certificate of Conformity Support Center Address Support Center Address List of R&S Representatives List of R&S Representatives Tabbed Divider Tabbed Divider...
Page 507 Contents Contents 3 Remote Control .......................... 3.1 Introduction..........................3.1 Brief Instructions........................3.1 Switchover to Remote Control ..................... 3.2 3.3.1 Remote Control via IEC Bus ..................3.2 3.3.1.1 Setting the Device Address ................3.2 3.3.1.2 Indications during Remote Control ..............3.2 3.3.1.3 Return to Manual Operation ................
Page 508 Contents 3.6.3.5 CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem ..............3.29 3.6.3.6 CALCulate:MATH Subsystem ................ 3.38 3.6.3.7 CALCulate:SMOothing Subsystem ..............3.39 3.6.3.8 CALCulate:TRANsform Subsystem ............... 3.40 3.6.3.9 CALCulate:UNIT Subsystem ................3.43 3.6.4 DIAGnostic Subsystem ....................3.44 3.6.5 DISPlay Subsystem ..................... 3.45 3.6.6 FORMat Subsystem ....................3.52 3.6.7 HCOPy Subsystem......................
Page 509 Contents 3.8.3.1 Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE) ....3.152 3.8.3.2 IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register (PPE) ........3.153 3.8.3.3 Event-Status Register (ESR) and Event-Status-Enable Register (ESE)..3.153 3.8.3.4 STATus:OPERation Register ............... 3.154 3.8.3.5 STATus:QUEStionable-Register ..............3.155 3.8.3.6 STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit Register............
Page 510 Contents 4 Maintenance and Troubleshooting ..................4.1 Maintenance........................... 4.1 4.1.1 Mechanical Maintenance....................4.1 4.1.2 Electrical Maintenance ....................4.1 4.1.2.1 Testing the Generator Level ................4.1 4.1.2.2 Testing the Receiver Accuracy................. 4.1 4.1.2.3 Testing the Frequency Accuracy ..............4.1 4.1.2.4 Verifying the Measuring Accuracy ..............4.1 Monitoring the Function .......................
Page 511 Contents Contents 5 Testing the Rated Specifications ..................5.1 Measuring Instruments and Accessories (ZVR, ZVRE, ZVRL).......... 5.1 Test Sequence (ZVR, ZVRE, ZVRL)..................5.2 5.2.1 Testing the Generator Specifications ................5.2 5.2.1.1 Frequency Accuracy..................5.2 5.2.1.2 Harmonics Suppression ................... 5.2 5.2.1.3 Spurious Suppression ..................5.3 5.2.1.4 Phase Noise .....................
Page 512 Contents 5.5.3 Testing the Test Set Specifications ................5.63 5.5.3.1 Matching to PORT1 and PORT2 ..............5.63 5.5.3.2 Directivity ......................5.63 5.5.3.3 Testing the Attenuators .................. 5.64 5.5.3.4 Crosstalk......................5.65 Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) ................5.66 5 Checking of Rated Specifications ..................
Page 513 Contents Annex A - Interfaces ........................A.1 IEC Bus Interface (SCPI IEC625, SYSTEM BUS)..............A.1 Interface Characteristics......................A.1 Bus Lines ..........................A.2 IEC Bus Messages ........................A.3 Interface Messages .........................A.3 Instrument Messages ......................A.4 RS-232-C Interface (COM1, COM2) ..................A.5 Interface Characteristics......................A.5 Signal Lines ..........................A.5 Transmission Parameters .......................A.6 Interface Functions ........................A.7 Handshake ..........................A.7 RSIB Interface...
Page 514 Contents Annex B – List of Error Messages ...................B.1 SCPI-Specific Error Messages .....................B.1 Annex C – List of Commands ....................C.1 Annex D – Programming Examples ..................D.1 Including IEC-Bus Library for QuickBasic ................D.1 Initialization and Default Status ...................D.1 D.2.1 Initiate Controller ......................D.1 D.2.2 Initiate Instrument......................D.1 Transmission of Instrument Setting Commands ...............D.2 Switchover to Manual Control....................D.2...
Page 515 Figures Figures Fig. 3-1 Tree structure of the SCPI command systems: The SENSe system ........3.9 Fig. 3-2 Model of the instrument in the case of remote control by means of the IEC bus ....3.146 Fig. 3-3 The status register model ....................3.149 Fig.
Page 516 Table 3-6 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register ......3.156 Table 3-7 Resettting instrument functions ..................3.159 Table 4-1 Possible error messages ....................... 4.2 ZVR, ZVRE, ZVRL, ZVC, ZVCE Table 5-1 Performance Test Report – Generator Specifications............5.17 Table 5-2 Performance Test Report: Receiver specifications ............. 5.31 Table 5-3 Performance Test Report: Test Set Specifications .............
Page 517 A list of softkeys and equivalent remote control commands or command sequences is given in section 3.9. Annex C contains a list of all remote control commands. APPLY CAL (TOSM)..........2.313, 3.93 APPLY CAL (TOSM, ZVRE) ......2.319, 3.93 APPLY CAL (TRANS AND REFL NORM, ZVR) = MKR (key) ............... 2.229 ................2.337, 3.93 APPLY CAL (TRANS AND REFL NORM, ZVRL) ................2.340, 3.93...
Page 518 ......2.126, 3.106, 3.107, 3.117, 3.118, 3.122 full one-port ............2.327 Compression point ............. 2.126 full two-port............2.305 measurement ............2.127 full two-port (ZVRE)..........2.317 CONFIG (key) ............2.167 fundamental (ZVRL) ..........2.332 CONFIG DISPLAY ............. 2.287 interpolation............2.342 Configuration normalization (ZVR)..........
Page 519 Index DATA SET LIST (RECALL) ........2.179 Diagram DATA SET LIST / CONTENTS (RECALL) (selection table) Cartesian .............2.64, 2.278 ................... 2.179 Charter............2.72, 2.284 DATA SET LIST / CONTENTS (SAVE) (selection table) expand ..............2.286 ................... 2.170 inverted Smith ............2.284 DATA TO MEMORY ........
Page 520 EXT SRC CONFIG (mixer measurement)....2.120 FULL TWO PORT ............2.305 EXT SRC1 (compression point) ....... 2.131, 3.122 FULL TWO PORT (ZVRE) ......... 2.317 EXT SRC1 EXT SRC2 (SOI) ......2.137, 3.122 Fuse................1.21 EXT SRC1 EXT SRC2 (TOI) ......2.137, 3.122 EXT SRC2 (compression point) .......
Page 521 ..............2.155 INVERTED SMITH..........2.284, 3.46 format ..............2.163 ISOLATION YES/NO (TOSM)........2.313 output device ............2.162 ISOLATION YES/NO (TOSM, ZVRE) ......2.319 position..............2.159 ITEMS TO RECALL (selection table) ......2.181 screen ..............2.158 ITEMS TO SAVE (selection table)......2.172 HARDCOPY DEVICE ........
Page 522 MATCH PORT 1 (ONE PATH, ZVRL) ....2.332, 3.92 LINE SECTIONS (selection table) ......2.239 MATCH PORT 1 (TOSM)........2.313, 3.92 Line style MATCH PORT 1 (TOSM, ZVRE) .......2.319, 3.92 selection of ............2.164 MATCH PORT 2 ......2.306, 2.308, 2.310, 3.92 LINE STYLE CHn ............2.164 MATCH PORT 2 (FULL ONE PORT) ....2.326, 3.92...
Page 523 OPEN PORT 1 (REFL NORM, ZVRL) ....2.339, 3.92 Plotter OPEN PORT 1 (TOSM)........2.313, 3.92 connection ............. 1.28 OPEN PORT 1 (TOSM, ZVRE) ......2.318, 3.92 POINTS/DEC ...........2.200, 3.113 OPEN PORT 1 (TRANS AND REFL NORM, ZVR) Polar diagram............... 2.68 ................
Page 524 (ZVC, ZVCE)..........5.58 RESET OFFSETS............2.372 test sequence (ZVC, ZVCE) ........5.53 RESPONSE (key group) ..........2.247 test sequence (ZVR, ZVRE, ZVRL) ......5.2 RESTART (key) ............2.206 test set (ZVC, ZVCE)..........5.63 RESTORE INSTD KITS ..........2.351 test set (ZVR, ZVRE, ZVRL)........5.14 RESUME CAL............
Page 525 SHORT PORT 1 (ONE PATH, ZVR) ....2.330, 3.92 softkey area............2.59 SHORT PORT 1 (ONE PATH, ZVRL) ....2.332, 3.92 subdivision .............2.60 SHORT PORT 1 (TOSM, ZVRE)......2.319, 3.92 SEARCH ..........2.223, 2.225, 3.32 SHORT PORT 2..........2.313, 3.92 SEARCH ← NEXT..........2.224, 3.32 SHORT PORT 2 (FULL ONE PORT) ....2.325, 3.92...
Page 526 START NEW CAL ............2.300 Test Sequence START NEW POWER CAL ........3.116 ZVC, ZVCE ............5.53 START POWER CAL ..........2.355 ZVR, ZVRE, ZVRL ........... 5.2 Start value ..............2.189 Testing the Rated Specifications ........5.1 Start-Up ................1.20 Thick Ethernet.............. 1.44 Status registers............
Page 527 Index TOM-X............... 2.314, 3.93 Windows NT..............1.23 TOSM ..............2.312, 3.93 administrator ............1.23 TOSM (ZVRE) ........... 2.318, 3.93 login ............... 1.23 TOUCHSTONE ..........2.173, 3.53 password ............... 1.23 Trace ................2.58 TRACE (key) .............. 2.292 TRACE MATH function..........2.176 X DB COMP POINT (compression point) ..2.129, 3.107 Tracking..............
Page 529 Important Hints before Operation: For all instruments: • The directory C:\R_S\INSTR and its subdirectories are reserved for system software. Never modify this directory in any way, otherwise the functioning of the instrument will be impaired. • Aborting a hardcopy is not possible when printout is in progress. Print jobs in the queue can be deleted before printout has been started by pressing the HARDCOPY START key until the message "Hardcopy in progress.
Page 530 Patent Information This product contains technology licensed by Marconi Instruments LTD. under US patents 4609881 and 4870384 and under corresponding patents in Germany and elsewhere. Please note the safety instructions on the next sheet ! 1043.0009.50...
Page 531 Before putting the product into operation for the first time, make sure to read the following S a f e t y I n s t r u c t i o n s Rohde & Schwarz makes every effort to keep the safety standard of its products up to date and to offer its customers the highest possible degree of safety.
Page 532 Safety Instructions Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by dangerous situations. Therefore, carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions before putting the product into operation. It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety instructions on personal safety that appear in other parts of the documentation.
Page 533 Safety Instructions 4. If products/components are mechanically 10. Intentionally breaking the protective earth and/or thermically processed in a manner connection either in the feed line or in the that goes beyond their intended use, product itself is not permitted. Doing so can hazardous substances (heavy-metal dust result in the danger of an electric shock such as lead, beryllium, nickel) may be...
Page 534 Safety Instructions 19. If a product is to be permanently installed, matching Rohde & Schwarz type (see the connection between the PE terminal on spare parts list). Batteries and storage site and the product's PE conductor must batteries are hazardous waste. Dispose of be made first before any other connection them only in specially marked containers.
Page 535 Por favor lea imprescindiblemente antes de la primera puesta en funcionamiento las siguientes informaciones de seguridad Informaciones de seguridad Es el principio de Rohde & Schwarz de tener a sus productos siempre al día con los estandards de seguridad y de ofrecer a sus clientes el máximo grado de seguridad. Nuestros productos y todos los equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados según las normas de seguridad vigentes.
Page 536 Informaciones de seguridad Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para tratar de evitar daños y peligros de toda clase. Es necesario de que se lean las siguientes informaciones de seguridad concienzudamente y se tengan en cuenta debidamente antes de la puesta en funcionamiento del producto. También deberán ser tenidas en cuenta las informaciones para la protección de personas que encontrarán en otro capítulo de esta documentación y que también son obligatorias de seguir.
Page 537 Informaciones de seguridad seguridad (control a primera vista, control de peligro a causa de la radiación conductor protector, medición de resistencia electromagnética. El empresario está de aislamiento, medición de medición de la comprometido a valorar y señalar areas de corriente conductora, control trabajo en las que se corra un riesgo de...
Page 538 Informaciones de seguridad 12. No utilice nunca el producto si está dañado el 20. En caso de que los productos que son cable eléctrico. Asegure a través de las instalados fijamente en un lugar sean sin medidas de protección y de instalación protector implementado, autointerruptor o adecuadas de que el cable de eléctrico no similares objetos de protección, deberá...
Page 539 Informaciones de seguridad 27. Baterías y acumuladores no deben de ser 31. Las asas instaladas en los productos sirven expuestos a temperaturas altas o al fuego. solamente de ayuda para el manejo que Guardar baterías y acumuladores fuera del solamente está previsto para personas. Por alcance de los niños.
Page 540 Vector Network Analyzer ZVCE 1127.8600.50/.51/.52 1127.8651.60 1127.8500.60 1127.8551.61/.62 ZVRE 1127.8551.51/.52/.55 ZVRL 1127.8551.41 complies with the provisions of the Directive of the Council of the European Union on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electrical equipment for use within defined voltage limits...
Page 541 EC Certificate of Conformity Certificate No.: 2000-05, page 2 This is to certify that: Equipment type Stock No. Designation ZVK-B21 1128.1409.11 Attenuator for Generator Port 1 ZVK-B22 1128.1409.21 Attenuator for Generator Port 2 ZVK-B23 1128.1409.12 Attenuator for Receiver Port 1 ZVK-B24 1128.1409.22 Attenuator for Receiver Port 2...
Page 542: Remote Control
Introduction/Brief Instructions 3 Remote Control 3.1 Introduction The instrument is equipped with two IEC/IEEE bus interfaces according to standard IEC 625.1/IEEE 488.1 and two RS-232 interfaces. Either the connector labeled SCPI IEC625 (the upper IEC/IEEE bus interface) or both of the RS-232 interfaces can be used for remote control of the instrument.
Page 543: Switchover To Remote Control
Switchover to Remote Control 3.3 Switchover to Remote Control On power-on, the instrument is always in the manual operating state ("LOCAL" state) and can be operated via the front panel. It is switched to remote control ("REMOTE" state) IEC/IEEE bus as soon as it receives an addressed command from a controller.
Page 544: Return To Manual Operation
Switchover to Remote Control 3.3.1.3 Return to Manual Operation Return to manual operation is possible via the front panel or the IEC bus. ½ Press the LOCAL key. Manually: Note: – Before switchover, command processing must be completed as otherwise switchover to remote control is effected immediately. –...
Page 545: Remote Control Via Rsib Interface
Switchover to Remote Control 3.3.2.3 Return to Manual Operation Return to manual operation is possible via the front panel or via RS-232 interface. ½ Press the LOCAL key. Manually: Note: – Before switchover, command processing must be completed as otherwise switchover to remote control is effected immediately. –...
Page 546: Unix Environment
Switchover to Remote Control 3.3.3.2 Unix Environment In order to access the measuring equipment via the RSIB interface, copy the librsib.so.X.Y file to a directory for which the control application has read rights. X.Y in the file name indicates the version number of the library, for example 1.0.
Page 547: Messages
Messages 3.4 Messages The messages transferred via the data lines of the IEC bus or via the RSIB Interface (see annex A) can be divided into two groups: – interface messages and – device messages. For the RS-232 interface, no interface messages are defined. 3.4.1 IEC/IEEE bus Interface Messages Interface messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC bus, the "ATN"...
Page 548: Device Messages (Commands And Device Responses)
Messages 3.4.3 Device Messages (Commands and Device Responses) Device messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC bus, the "ATN" control line not being active. ASCII code is used. The device messages are more or less equal for the 2 interfaces (IEC/IEEE bus and RS-232).
Page 549: Structure And Syntax Of The Device Messages
Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages 3.5.1 SCPI Introduction SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) describes a standard command set for programming instruments, irrespective of the type of instrument or manufacturer. The goal of the SCPI consortium is to standardize the device-specific commands to a large extent.
Page 550 Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages Device-specific commands Hierarchy: Device-specific commands are of hierarchical structure (see Fig. 3-1). The different levels are represented by combined headers. Headers of the highest level (root level) have only one key word. This key word denotes a complete command system.
Page 551 Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages Optional key words: Some command systems permit certain key words to be optionally inserted into the header or omitted. These key words are marked by square brackets in the description. The full command length must be recognized by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standard.
Page 552: Structure Of A Command Line
Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages 3.5.3 Structure of a Command Line A command line may consist of one or several commands. It is terminated by a <New Line>, a <New Line> with EOI or an EOI together with the last data byte. Quick BASIC automatically produces an EOI together with the last data byte.
Page 553: Parameters
Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages 3.5.5 Parameters Most commands require a parameter to be specified. The parameters must be separated from the header by a "white space". Permissible parameters are numerical values, Boolean parameters, text, character strings and block data. The type of parameter required for the respective command and the permissible range of values are specified in the command description (see Section 3.6).
Page 554: Overview Of Syntax Elements
Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages Text Text parameters observe the syntactic rules for key words, i.e. they can be entered using a short or long form. Like any parameter, they have to be separated from the header by a white space. In the case of a query, the short form of the text is provided.
Page 555: Description Of Commands
Description of Commands Description of Commands 3.6.1 Notation In the following sections, all commands implemented in the instrument are first listed in tables and then described in detail, separated according to the command system. The notation corresponds to the one of the SCPI standards to a large extent.
Page 556 Description of Commands Special characters A selection of key words with an identical effect exists for several commands. These key words are indicated in the same line, they are separated by a vertical stroke. Only one of these key words has to be indicated in the header of the command.
Page 557 Description of Commands <numeric_value> <num> These indications mark parameters which may be entered as numeric values or be set using specific keywords (character data). The keywords given below are permitted: MINimum This keyword sets the parameter to the smallest possible value.
Page 558: Common Commands
Common Commands 3.6.2 Common Commands The common commands are taken from the IEEE 488.1 (IEC 625-2) standard. Same commands have the same effect on different devices. The headers of these commands consist of an asterisk "*" followed by three letters. Many common commands refer to the status reporting system which is described in detail in Section 3.8.
Page 559 Common Commands *CAL? CALIBRATION QUERY triggers a calibration of the instrument and subsequently query the calibration status. Any responses > 0 indicate errors. *CLS CLEAR STATUS sets the status byte (STB), the standard event register (ESR) and the EVENt-part of the QUEStionable and the OPERation register to zero. The command does not alter the mask and transition parts of the registers.
Page 560 Common Commands *PRE 0 to 255 PARALLEL POLL REGISTER ENABLE sets parallel poll enable register to the value indicated. Query *PRE? returns the contents of the parallel poll enable register in decimal form. *PSC 0 | 1 POWER ON STATUS CLEAR determines whether the contents of the ENABle registers is maintained or reset in switching on.
Page 561: Calculate Subsystem
CALCulate Subsystem 3.6.3 CALCulate Subsystem The CALCulate subsystem contains commands for converting instrument data, transforming and carrying out corrections. These functions are carried out subsequent to data acquisition, i.e., following the SENSe subsystem. CALCulate1...4 selects the corresponding channel CH1...CH4. 3.6.3.1 CALCulate:FILTer - Subsystem The CALCulate:FILTer subsystem defines how filter functions are applied to the measured data sets.
Page 562 CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate[1...4]:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:SPAN This command defines the span of the gate. Syntax: CALCulate[1...4]:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:SPAN <numeric_value> "CALC:FILT:TIME:SPAN 50ms" Example: *RST-Wert: 1 ns Features: SCPI: conforming CALCulate[1...4]:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:CENTer This command defines the center value for the gate. CALCulate[1...4]:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:CENTer <numeric_value> Syntax: "CALC:FILT:TIME:CENT 35ms" Example: Features: *RST-Wert: SCPI: conforming...
Page 563: Calculate:format Subsystem
CALCulate Subsystem 3.6.3.2 CALCulate:FORMat Subsystem The CALCulate:FORMat subsystem specifies the display format of the measured data. COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT CALCulate<1...4> :FORMat COMPlex|MAGNitude|PHASe| UPHase|REAL|IMAGinary|SWR| GDELay|L|C CALCulate[1 to 4]:FORMat This command defines in which format the complex measured quantity is displayed. Syntax: CALCulate[1...4]:FORMat COMPlex | MAGNitude | PHASe | UPHase |...
Page 564: Calculate:gdaperture Subsystem
CALCulate Subsystem 3.6.3.3 CALCulate:GDAPerture Subsystem The CALCulate:GDAPerture - subsystem defines the parameters for the group delay and the aperture. COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT CALCulate<1..4> GDAPerture :MODE STEP | FREQuency [:SPAN] <numeric_value> :SCOunt <numeric_value> CALCulate[1...4]:GDAPerture:MODE This command switches between the aperture defined as a number of points (STEP) or as a fixed frequency value..
Page 565: Calculate:limit Subsystem
CALCulate Subsystem 3.6.3.4 CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem The CALCulate:LIMit subsystem comprises the limit lines and the corresponding limit checks. COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT CALCulate<1..4> :LIMit<1...8> :STATe <Boolean> :RDOMain :COMPlex S | SINV | Y | Z | YREL | ZREL :FORMat COMPlex | MAGNitude | PHASe | REAL | IMAGinary | SWR | GDELay | L | C :SPACing...
Page 566 CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate[1...4]:LIMit[1...8]: RDOMain:COMPlex This command defines the complex conversion of the measured value belonging to the limit line. Syntax: CALCulate[1...4]:LIMit[1...8]: RDOMain:COMPlex S | SINV | Y | Z | YREL | ZREL "CALC:LIM:RDOM:COMP Y" Example: *RST value: – Features: SCPI: device-specific CALCulate[1...4]:LIMit[1...8]: RDOMain:FORMat...
Page 567 CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate[1..4]:LIMit[1...8]:CONTrol:SHIFt This command shifts a limit line along the x-axis direction by the value specified. Syntax: CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol:SHIFt <numeric_value> Example: "CALC:LIM2:CONTrol:SHIFT 50KHZ" Features: *RST value: SCPI: device-specific The command is an "event",, which is why it is not assigned an *RST value. CALCulate[1...4]:LIMit[1...8]:CENTer This command defines the coordinates of the center of the tolerance circle.
Page 568 CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate[1...4]:LIMit[1...8]:UPPer:STATe This command switches on and off the limit check with an upper limit line. Syntax: CALCulate[1...4]:LIMit[1...8]:UPPer:STATe ON | OFF "CALC:LIM:UPPer:STAT ON" Example: *RST value: Features: SCPI: conforming The result of the limit check can be queried with the command CALCulate:LIMit<1...8>:FAIL? CALCulate[1...4]:LIMit[1...8]:UPPer:RADius This command defines the radius of the limit line in a circle diagram.
Page 569 CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate[1...4]:LIMit[1...8]:FAIL? This command queries the result of the limit check. CALCulate[1...4]:LIMit[1...8]:FAIL? Syntax: "CALC:LIM:FAIL?" Example: *RST value: Features: SCPI: conforming CALCulate[1...4]:LIMit[1...8]:CLEar[:IMMediate] This command deletes the result of the current limit check. Syntax: CALCulate[1...4]:LIMit[1...8]:CLEar[:IMMediate] "CALC:LIM:CLE" Example: *RST value: Features: SCPI: conforming This command is an event,, which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.
Page 570: Calculate:marker Subsystem
CALCulate Subsystem 3.6.3.5 CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem The CALCulate:MARKer subsystem controls the marker functions. COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT CALCulate<1..4> :MARKer<1...8> [:STATe] <Boolean> :AOFF no query :MODE CONTinuous | DISCrete :COUPled [:STATe] <Boolean> <numeric_value> HZ | S | DBM :MODE ABS | REL query only :FORMat MLINear | MDB | PHASe |...
Page 571 CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate[1 to 4]:MARKer[1 to 8][:STATe] This command switches on or off the selected marker (1 to 8). If no indication is made, marker 1 is selected automatically. Syntax: CALCulate[1 to 4]:MARKer[1 to 8][:STATe] ON | OFF Example: "CALC:MARK3 ON" Features: *RST value: SCPI:...
Page 572 CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate[1 to 4]:MARKer[1 to 8]:X This command positions the selected marker to the indicated stimulus value. If the marker is a delta marker, the position can be specified either absolutely, or relative relation to the reference marker. Syntax: CALCulate[1 to 4]:MARKer[1 to 8]:X <numeric value>...
Page 573 CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:SEARch[:IMMediate] This command triggers a search for absolute extreme values for the active marker. Syntax: CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:SEARch[:IMMediate] "CALC:MARK:SEAR" Example: *RST value: Features: SCPI: device-specific This command is an event,, which is why it is not assigned an *RST-value and has no query. CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:SEARch:NEXT This command triggers the search for the next local extreme value for the active marker.
Page 574 CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:MAXimum This command triggers the search for the maximum of the trace for the active marker. Syntax: CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:MAXimum "CALC:MARK:MAX" Example: *RST value: – Features: SCPI: device-specific This command is an event,, which is why it is not assigned an *RST-value and has no query. CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:MINimum This command triggers the search for the minimum of the trace for the active marker.
Page 575 CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:QFACtor This command defines the quality factor for the marker search function. CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:QFACtor Syntax: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:QFAC 100" Example: Features: *RST value: – SCPI: device-specific CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:SFACtor This command defines the form factor for the marker search function. Syntax: CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:SFACtor <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>...
Page 576 CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:EDELay:VALue? This command queries the value of the electrical or the mechanical length or the phase delay. The format of the return value must be selected beforehand with CALC:MARK:FUNC:EDEL. The suffix of MARKer has no meaning. CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:EDELay:VALue? Syntax: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:EDEL:VAL?"...
Page 577 CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:PTPeak:STATe This command switches the determination of the maximum and minimum measured value (peak-to- peak value ) on or off. Syntax: CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:PTPeak:STATe ON | OFF "CALC:MARK:FUNC:PTP:STAT ON" Example: *RST value: Features: SCPI: device-specific CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:PTPeak:RESult? This command queries the result of the peak-to-peak value search. CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:PTPeak:RESult? [ALL] Syntax:...
Page 578 CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:REFerence This command sets the reference level to the current marker level. Syntax: CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:REFerence Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:REF" Features: *RST value: SCPI: device-specific This command is an "event",, which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query. 1043.0009.50 3.37 E-15...
Page 579: Calculate:math Subsystem
CALCulate Subsystem 3.6.3.6 CALCulate:MATH Subsystem The CALCulate:MATH - Subsystem allows to process data from the SENSe-subsystem with numerical expressions. COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT CALCulate[1 to 4] :MATH [:EXPRession] [:DEFine] <expr> :STATe <Boolean> CALCulate[1...4]:MATH[:EXPression][:DEFine] This command defines the mathematical expression for data processing. Syntax: CALCulate[1...4]:MATH[:EXPRession][:DEFine] <expr>...
Page 580: Calculate:smoothing Subsystem
CALCulate Subsystem 3.6.3.7 CALCulate:SMOothing Subsystem The CALCulate:SMOothing - Subsystem allows to smooth a data set point-by-point taking into account the values at adjacent points. COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT CALCulate<1..4> :SMOOthing [:STATe] <Boolean> :APERture <numeric_value> CALCulate[1...4]:SMOothing[:STATe] This command determines the type of transformation of the data sets. Syntax: CALCulate[1...4]:SMOothing[:STATe] ON | OFF...
Page 581: Calculate:transform Subsystem
CALCulate Subsystem 3.6.3.8 CALCulate:TRANsform Subsystem The CALCulate:TRANsform subsystem defines the transformation of data sets into other representations. COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT CALCulate<1..4> :TRANsform :COMPlex S | SINV | Y | Z | YREL | ZREL ZREFerence <numeric_value> :TIME :STATe <Boolean> :METHod FFT | CHIRp [:TYPE]...
Page 582 CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate[1...4]:TRANsform:TIME:METHod This command selects the transformation method (fast Fourier or chirp transformation) to be used. Syntax: CALCulate[1...4]:TRANsform:TIME:METHod FFT | CHIRp "CALC:TRAN:TIME:METH FFT" Example: *RST-Wert: CHIRp Features: SCPI: device-specific CALCulate[1...4]:TRANsform:TIME[:TYPE] This command selects the time domain transformation mode (lowpass or bandpass). CALCulate[1...4]:TRANsform:TIME:TYPE BPASs | LPASs Syntax: "CALC:TRAN:TIME LPAS"...
Page 583 CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate[1...4]:TRANsform:TIME:STOP This command defines the stop time for the time domain transformation. Syntax: CALCulate[1...4]:TRANsform:TIME:STOP <numeric_value> "CALC:TRAN:TIME:STARt 60ms" Example: *RST-Wert: + 500 ps Features: SCPI: conforming CALCulate[1...4]:TRANsform:TIME:SPAN This command defines the start time for the time domain transformation. CALCulate[1...4]:TRANsform:TIME:SPAN <numeric_value>...
Page 584: Calculate:unit Subsystem
CALCulate Subsystem 3.6.3.9 CALCulate:UNIT Subsystem The CALCulate:UNIT - subsystem defines the physical units to be used for the measured values. COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT CALCulate<1..4> :UNIT :POWer MW | W | UV | MV | V | DBM | DBW | DBUV | DBMV | DBV MW | W | UV | MV | V | DBM | DBW | DBUV | DBMV | DBV MW | W | UV | MV | V |...
Page 585: Diagnostic Subsystem
DIAGnostic Subsystem 3.6.4 DIAGnostic Subsystem The DIAGnostic subsystem contains the commands which support instrument diagnostics for maintenance, service and repair. In accordance with the SCPI standard, all of these commands are device-specific. COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT DIAGnostic :SERVice :FUNCtion <numeric_value>,<numeric_value>.. no query :RFPower <Boolean>...
Page 586: Display Subsystem
DISPlay Subsystem 3.6.5 DISPlay Subsystem The DISPLay subsystem controls the selection and presentation of textual and graphic information and of trace data on the display. The commands for TRACe1 refer to the active measured value memory, the commands for TRACe2 to the memory trace.
Page 587 DISPlay Subsystem DISPlay:FORMat:EXPand This command switches the expanded representation on or off. Syntax: DISPlay:FORMat:EXPand ON | OFF "DISP:FORM:EXP ON" Example: *RST value: Features: SCPI: device-specific DISPlay:PROGram[:MODE] This command switches the screen between the measuring instrument and the controller function. Syntax: DISPlay:PROGram:[MODE] ON | OFF "DISP:PROG ON"...
Page 588 DISPlay Subsystem DISPlay[:WINDow[1...4]]:DIAGram:SEGMented:R This command defines the segment limits for polar diagrams. A maximum of 3 segments can be defined. The separation line between two segments is common, i.e. there are neither gaps nor overlaps. The numeric values refer to the unit used in the diagram and are sorted in descending order.
Page 589 DISPlay Subsystem DISPlay[:WINDow[1 to 4]]:TRACe[1|2]:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel This command defines the reference level. In addition to the units given in the table, the following units and prefixes are permitted for the individual measured quantities: Power: DBM, DB, DBW, W, MW, UW, NW, PW Voltage: V, MV, UV, NV, PV, DBV, DBMV, DBUV Phase:...
Page 590 DISPlay Subsystem DISPlay[:WINDow[1 to 4]]:TRACe[1|2]:Y[:SCALe]:BOTTom This command defines the lower edge of the grid. In addition to the units given in the table, the following units and prefixes are permitted for the individual measured quantities: Power: DBM, DB, DBW, W, MW, UW, NW, PW Voltage: V, MV, UV, NV, PV, DBV, DBMV, DBUV Phase:...
Page 591 DISPlay Subsystem DISPlay[:WINDow[1 to 4]]:TRACe[1|2]:Y[:SCALe]:OFFSet This command defines an offset value to be added to the output values. In addition to the units given in the table, the following units and prefixes are permitted for the individual measured quantities: Power: DBM, DBW, MW, UW, NW, PW Voltage: V, MV, UV, NV, PV,...
Page 592 DISPlay Subsystem DISPlay[:WINDow[1 to 4]:TRACe[1|2][:STATe] This command switches the display of the current trace on or off. Syntax: DISPlay[:WINDow[1 to 4]]:TRACe[1|2][:STATe] ON | OFF Example: "DISP:TRAC2 ON" Features: *RST value: ON for TRACe1, OFF for TRACe2 SCPI: conforming 1043.0009.50 3.51 E-15...
Page 593: Format Subsystem
FORMat Subsystem 3.6.6 FORMat Subsystem The FORMat subsystem specifies the format of the data transmitted from and to the analyzer. COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT FORMat [:DATA] ASCii|REAL[,<numeric_value>] :DEXPort ASCii | TOUChstone | SCOMpact :FORMat COMPlex | MLPHase | MDPHase :MODe NEW | APPend :DSEParator POINt | COMMa...
Page 594 FORMat Subsystem FORMat:DEXPort This command defines the format of the file to be generated. Syntax: FORMat:DEXPort ASCii | TOUChstone | SCOMpact "FORM:DEXP ASCII" Example: *RST value: ASCii Features: SCPI: conforming The file format can be compatible to ASCII (can be imported into arbitrary applications), TOUCHSTONE or SUPERCOMPACT FORMat:DEXPort:FORMat This command defines the format for representing the measurement values.
Page 595 FORMat Subsystem FORMat:DEXPort:SOURce This command defines the source of measurement data. Syntax: FORMat:DEXPort:SOURce CDATa | CVData | TDATa | FDATa | MDATa | DDATa "FORM:DEXP:SOUR CDAT" Example: *RST value: DDATa Features: SCPI: conforming The possible sources correspond to different stages in the flow of measurement data: CVDATa FDATa MDATa...
Page 596: Hcopy Subsystem
HCOPy Subsystem 3.6.7 HCOPy Subsystem The HCOPy subsystem controls the output of screen information to output devices or files for documentation purposes. COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT HCOPy :ABORt no query :DESTination<1|2> <string> no query :DEVice :COLor <Boolean> :LANGuage<1|2> HPGL | PCL4 | PCL4_C | PCL4_C3 | PCL5 | LASerj | DESKJ | DESKJ_C | DESKJ_C3 | POSTscript | EPSON24 | EPSON24C | WMF | PCX | HP7470...
Page 597 HCOPy Subsystem HCOPy:ABORt This command aborts an active print job. Syntax: HCOPy:ABORt Example: "HCOP:ABOR" Features: *RST value: – SCPI: conforming This command is an "event", which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query. HCOPy:DESTination<1|2> <string> This command selects the device for outputting the hardcopy.
Page 598 HCOPy Subsystem HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage<1|2> This command determines the data format of the printout. Syntax: HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage HPGL | PCL4 | PCL4_C | PCL4_C3 | PCL5 | LASERJ | DESKJ | DESKJ_C | DESKJ_C3 | POSTscript | EPSON24 |EPSON24C | WMF | Example: "HCOP:DEV:LANG WMF"...
Page 599 HCOPy Subsystem HCOPy:ITEM:ALL This command selects the complete screen to be output. Syntax: HCOPy:ITEM:ALL Example: "HCOP:ITEM:ALL" Features: *RST value: SCPI: conforming The hardcopy output is always provided with comments, title, time and date. As an alternative to the whole screen, only traces (commands ’HCOPy:DEVice:WINDow:TRACe:STATe ON’) or tables (command ’HCOPy:DEVice:WINDow:TABLe:STATe ON’) can be output.
Page 600 HCOPy Subsystem HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1...4>:TEXT This command selects the comment text for printout to trace 1 or 2. Syntax: HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1...4>:TEXT <string> Example: "HCOP:ITEM:WIND2:TEXT ‘Comment’" Features: *RST value: – SCPI: device-specific HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1...4>:TRACe:STATe This command selects the currently displayed trace for output. Syntax: HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1...4>:TRACe:STATe ON | OFF Example: "HCOP:ITEM:WIND2:TRACe:STAT ON"...
Page 601 HCOPy Subsystem HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow[1...4]:TRACe[1|2]:LTYPe:AINCrement This command causes automatic incrementation of the line style of the active-channel test trace after each hardcopy generated. The command is available only if a plotter is selected as an output device. The command has no effect on the memory traces. In automatic incrementation, line styles STYLe7 to STYLe3 are activated one after the other.
Page 602: Initiate Subsystem
INITiate Subsystem 3.6.8 INITiate Subsystem The INITiate subsystem controls the initialization of the trigger subsystem. COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT INITiate :CONTinuous <boolean> [:IMMediate] no query INITiate:CONTinuous This command determines if the trigger system is continuously initiated ("Free Run").. Syntax: INITiate:CONTinuous ON | OFF Example: "INIT:CONT OFF"...
Page 603: Input Subsystem
INPut Subsystem 3.6.9 INPut Subsystem The INPut subsystem controls the features of the input of the instrument. COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT INPut :ATTenuation <numeric_value> :BRIDge INTernal | BYPass | FPORt :UPORt<1|2> [:VALue?] :STATe <Boolean> INPut[1|2]:ATTenuation This command determines the attenuation of the attenuator in the signal path of the incident wave b1 or b2.
Page 604: 10Instrument Subsystem
INSTrument Subsystem 3.6.10 INSTrument Subsystem The INSTrument subsystem selects the measuring mode of the instrument either via text parameters or via assigned default numbers. COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT INSTrument :COUPle ALL | NONE [:SELect] CHANNEL1 | CHANNEL2 | CHANNEL3 | CHANNEL4 :NSELect <numeric_value>...
Page 605: 11Mmemory Subsystem
MMEMory Subsystem 3.6.11 MMEMory Subsystem The MMEMory (mass memory) subsystem provides the commands which allow for access to the storage media of the instrument and for storing and loading various instrument settings. The NAMe command stores the HCOPy outputs in a file. The various drives can be addressed via the mass storage unit specifier <msus>...
Page 606 MMEMory Subsystem COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT :SELect [:ITEM] :GSETup <Boolean> :HWSettings <Boolean> :LINes [:ALL] <Boolean> :CSETup <Boolean> :CDATa <Boolean> :CKData <Boolean> :HCOPy <Boolean> :MACRos <Boolean> :MTRace<1...8> <Boolean> :AFILes <Boolean> :ALL no query :NONE no query :DEFault no query :COMMent <string> MMEMory:CATalog? This command queries the contents of the current directory.
Page 607 MMEMory Subsystem MMEMory:DATA This command writes block data to a specified file. Syntax: MMEMory:DATA <file_name>,<block> MMEMory:DATA? <file_name> <file_name> ::= DOS file name <block> ::= binary data block "MMEM:DATA? ’TEST01.HCP’" Example: *RST value: – Features: SCPI: conforming The delimiter must be set to EOI in order to obtain a perfect data transfer. MMEMory:DELete This command deletes the files indicated.
Page 608 MMEMory Subsystem MMEMory:LOAD:STATe This command loads instrument settings from files. Syntax: MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 1,<file_name> <file_name> ::= DOS file name Example: "MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1,’A:TEST.CFG’" Features: *RST value: – SCPI: conforming The contents of the file are loaded and determine the new state of the instrument. The file name may comprise the specification of the path and, eventually, the name of the drive.
Page 609 MMEMory Subsystem MMEMory:NAME This command specifies a file which is printed or plotted. Syntax: MMEMory:NAME <file_name> <file_name> ::= DOS filename Example: "MMEM:NAME ’PLOT1.HPG’" Features: *RST value: SCPI: conforming The file name may comprise the specification of the path and, eventually, the name of the drive. Indication of the path is according to the DOS conventions.
Page 610 MMEMory Subsystem MMEMory:CLEar:ALL This command deletes all device settings in the current directory. Syntax: MMEMory:CLEar:ALL Example: "MMEM:CLE:ALL" Features: *RST value: SCPI: device-specific This command is an "event", which is why it is not assigned an *RST-value and has no query. MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:GSETup This command includes the general setup data in the list of partial data sets of a device setting which are to be stored/loaded.
Page 611 MMEMory Subsystem MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:CSETup This command includes the current screen color settings in the list of partial data sets of a device setting which are to be stored/loaded. Syntax: MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:CSETup ON|OFF Example: "MMEM:SEL:CSET ON" Features: *RST value: SCPI: device-specific MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:CDATa This command includes the current calibration data in the list of partial data sets of a device setting which are to be stored/loaded.
Page 612 MMEMory Subsystem MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:AFILes This command includes the ASCII data sets generated in the list of partial data sets of a device setting which are to be stored/loaded. Syntax: MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:AFILes ON|OFF Example: "MMEM:SEL:AFILes ON" Features: *RST value: SCPI: device-specific MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL This command includes all partial data sets in the list of partial data sets of a device setting which are to be stored/loaded.
Page 613: 12Output Subsystem
OUTPut Subsystem 3.6.12 OUTPut Subsystem The OUTPut subsystem controls the output features of the analyzer. COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT OUTPut<1|2> :ATTenuation <numeric_value> :DPORt PORT1 | PORT2 :POWer NORMal | HIGH :RMIXer [:STATe] <Boolean> :UPORt<1|2> [:VALue] <Binary> :STATe <Boolean> OUTPut[1|2]:ATTenuation This command determines the attenuation of the attenuator located in the signal path of the wave a1 or a2 propagating towards the DUT.
Page 614 OUTPut Subsystem OUTPut:UPORt<1|2>[:VALue] This command sets the control lines of the user port. If the user port was set to INPut previously, the output value is stored intermediately. Syntax: OUTPut:UPORt<1|2>[:VALue] <Binary> <Binary>::= 00000000 ... 11111111 Example: "OUTP:UPOR2 #B10100101" Features: *RST value: –...
Page 615: 13Program - Subsystem
PROGram - Subsystem 3.6.13 PROGram - Subsystem The PROGram-subsystem contains commands used to start and control application programs on the instrument. COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT PROGram [:SELected] :NAME ZVR_K9 | PROG :STRing <varname>[,<string>] :EXECute <cmdname> no query PROGram[:SELected]:NAME This command specifies the name of the application to be selected. PROGram[:SELected]:NAME ZVR_K9 | PROG Syntax:...
Page 616 PROGram - Subsystem PROGram[:SELected]:EXECute This command executes the specified command in the selected application. Syntax: PROGram[:SELected]:EXECute <cmdname> <cmdname> ::= ’EMBED’ | ’DEEMBED’ | ’RUN’ "PROG:EXEC ’EMBED’" Example: Features: *RST value: SCPI: conforming The commands ’EMBED’ and ’DEEMBED’ enable the calculation of input files (previously indicated by PROG:STR) in the ZVR_K9 application.
Page 617: 14Sense Subsystem
SENSe Subsystem 3.6.14 SENSe Subsystem The SENSe subsystem is divided up into several subsystems. The commands of these subsystems directly control device-specific settings, they do not refer to the signal characteristics of the measurement signal. 3.6.14.1 SENSe:AVERage Subsystem The SENSe:AVERage subsystem calculates the average of the data acquired: Various successive measurements are combined in order to obtain a new test result.
Page 618: Sense:bandwidth Subsystem
SENSe Subsystem [:SENSe[1 to 4]:]AVERage:MODE The command selects the type of the average function. Syntax: [:SENSe[1 to 4]:]AVERage:MODE SWEep | POINt Example: "AVER:MODE POIN" Features: *RST value: NORMal SCPI: device-specific 3.6.14.2 SENSe:BANDwidth Subsystem This subsystem controls the setting of the analyzer’s filter bandwidths. The commands BANDwidth and BWIDth have the same effect.
Page 619: Sense:correction Subsystem
SENSe Subsystem 3.6.14.3 SENSe:CORRection Subsystem The SENSe:CORRection subsystem controls the system error correction and the recording of the individual correction values. COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT [SENSe<1...4>] :CORRection [:STATe] <Boolean> :DATA <string>,<block> | <numeric_value>... :DATE? query only :INTerpolate [:STATe] <Boolean> :AKAL :SELect <string>...
Page 620 SENSe Subsystem COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT [SENSe<1...4>] :CORRection :CKIT :N<50|75> :MMTHrough <string>, <string>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value> :MFTHrough <string>, <string>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value> :FFTHrough <string>, <string>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value> :MMLINE<1|2> <string>, <string>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value> :MFLINE<1|2> <string>, <string>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>,...
Page 621 SENSe Subsystem COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT [SENSe<1...4>] :CORRection :CKIT :N<50|75> :MFSNetwork <string>, <string>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, OPEN | SHORT :FFSNetwork <string>, <string>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, OPEN | SHORT :MOPen <string>, <string>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>,...
Page 622 SENSe Subsystem COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT [SENSe<1...4>] :CORRection :CKIT :N<50|75> :MREFlect <string>, <string>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, OPEN | SHORT :FREFlect <string>, <string>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, OPEN | SHORT :MMTCh <string>, <string>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>...
Page 623 SENSe Subsystem COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT [SENSe<1...4>] :CORRection :CKIT :SMA MMTHrough | MFTHrough | FFTHrough | MMLINE1 | MFLINE1 | FFLINE1 | MMLINE2 | MFLINE2 | FFLINE2 | MMATten | MFATten | FFATten | MMSNetwork | MFSNetwork | FFSNetwork | MOPen | FOPen | MSHort | FSHort | MREFlect | FREFlect |...
Page 624 SENSe Subsystem COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT [SENSe<1...4>] :CORRection :CKIT :SMA :MMSNetwork <string>, <string>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, OPEN | SHORT :MFSNetwork <string>, <string>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, OPEN | SHORT :FFSNetwork <string>, <string>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>,...
Page 625 SENSe Subsystem COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT [SENSe<1...4>] :CORRection :CKIT :SMA :FSHort <string>, <string>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value> :MREFlect <string>, <string>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, OPEN | SHORT :FREFlect <string>, <string>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>,...
Page 626 SENSe Subsystem COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT [SENSe<1...4>] :CORRection :CKIT :PC<7|35|292> MMTHrough | MFTHrough | FFTHrough | MMLINE1 | MFLINE1 | FFLINE1 | MMLINE2 | MFLINE2 | FFLINE2 | MMATten | MFATten | FFATten | MMSNetwork | MFSNetwork | FFSNetwork | MOPen | FOPen | MSHort | FSHort | MREFlect | FREFlect |...
Page 627 SENSe Subsystem COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT [SENSe<1...4>] :CORRection :CKIT :PC<7|35|292> :MMSNetwork <string>, <string>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, OPEN | SHORT :MFSNetwork <string>, <string>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, OPEN | SHORT :FFSNetwork <string>, <string>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>,...
Page 628 SENSe Subsystem COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT [SENSe<1...4>] :CORRection :CKIT :PC<7|35|292> :FSHort <string>, <string>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value> :MREFlect <string>, <string>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, OPEN | SHORT :FREFlect <string>, <string>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>,...
Page 629 SENSe Subsystem COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT [SENSe<1...4>] :CORRection :CKIT :USER<1|2> MMTHrough | MFTHrough | FFTHrough | MMLINE1 | MFLINE1 | FFLINE1 | MMLINE2 | MFLINE2 | FFLINE2 | MMATten | MFATten | FFATten | MMSNetwork | MFSNetwork | FFSNetwork | MOPen | FOPen | MSHort | FSHort | MREFlect | FREFlect | MMTCh | FMTCh |...
Page 630 SENSe Subsystem COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT [SENSe<1...4>] :CORRection :CKIT :USER<1|2> :MMSNetwork <string>, <string>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, OPEN | SHORT :MFSNetwork <string>, <string>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, OPEN | SHORT :FFSNetwork <string>, <string>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>,...
Page 631 SENSe Subsystem COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT [SENSe<1...4>] :CORRection :CKIT :USER<1|2> :FSHort <string>, <string>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value> :MREFlect <string>, <string>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, OPEN | SHORT :FREFlect <string>, <string>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>,...
Page 632 SENSe Subsystem COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT [SENSe<1...4>] :CORRection :EDELay<1|2> [:TIME] <numeric_value> :DISTance <numeric_value> :ELENgth <numeric_value> :DIELectric <numeric_value> :AUTO ONCE no query :STATe <Boolean> :OFFSet<1|2> :STATe <Boolean> :MAGNitude <numeric_value> :PHASe <numeric_value> :POWer [:STATe] <Boolean> :DATE? only query :ACQuire B1 | B2 | IFRef no query [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:AKAL:SELect This command selects an active data set for the AutoKal box.
Page 633 SENSe Subsystem [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:AKAL:CLEar This command clears the selected data set for the AutoKal box. The suffix of SENSe is not significant. Syntax: [SENSe[1...4]:]CORREction:AKAL:CLEar <string> "CORR:AKAL:CLE ‘AK1’" Example: *RST value: Features: device-specific SCPI: The command is an "event",, which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query. [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:AKAL:REName This command names a data set for the AutoKal box, the first parameter indicating the target name and the second one the source name.
Page 634 SENSe Subsystem [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod This command defines the calibration method. Syntax: [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod FTRans | RTRans | FRTRans | TOM | TRM | TRL | TNA | TOMX| TOSM | FUNDamental | FOPORT1 | FOPORT2 | FOPORT12 | FOPTport | ROPTport | REFL1 | REFL2 | REFL12 | TPORT | FTREF1 | RTREF2 "CORR:COLL:METH TOM"...
Page 635 SENSe Subsystem [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:CKIT:INSTall The command installs a calibration kit data set from a file. [SENSe[1...4]:]CORREction:CKIT:INSTall <filename> Syntax: "CORR:CKIT:INST ‘A:\mykit.ck’" Example: Features: *RST value: SCPI: device-specific [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:CKIT:<CAL-Kit-Typ>:<Standard> The command configures the parameters of the different standards. [SENSe[1...4]:]CORREction:CKIT: string>, Syntax: <CAL-Kit-Typ>:<Standard> <string>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>,...
Page 636 SENSe Subsystem [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:CKIT:<CAL-Kit-Typ>:SELect This command selects a defined calibration kit from the specified connector family. Syntax: [SENSe[1...4]:]CORREction:CKIT:<CAL-Kit-Typ>:SELect <string> "CORR:CKIT:N50:SEL ‘ZCAN’ Example: *RST value: Features: SCPI: device-specific [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:CKIT:USER<1|2>:IMPedance This command sets the impedance of the USER calibration kit. [SENSe[1...4]:]CORREction:CKIT:USER<1|2>:IMPedance <numeric_value> Syntax: "CORR:CKIT:USER2:IMP 40 OHM Example: 50 Ω...
Page 637 SENSe Subsystem Two-port standards are either MM = connector/connector, FF = socket/socket or MF = connector/socket, one-port standards are either M = connector or F = socket. The following standards are available: THRough Through connection LINE1 Line 1 for TRL-procedure (ZVR and ZVC only) LINE2 Line 2 for TRL-procedure (ZVR and ZVC only) ATTenuation...
Page 638 SENSe Subsystem [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:EDELay[1|2]:ELENgth This command defines the length offset as an electrical length. Syntax: [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:EDELay[1|2]:ELENgth <numeric value> "CORR:EDEL:ELEN 12.32mm" Example: *RST value: Features: SCPI: device-specific [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:EDELay[1|2]:DIELectric This command defines the value of the dielectric corresponding to the length specified via EDELay:DISTance.
Page 639 SENSe Subsystem [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:OFFSet[1|2]:MAGNitude This command defines the amplitude offset. [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:OFFSet[1|2]:MAGNitude Syntax: "CORR:OFFS:MAGN 3" Example: Features: *RST value: SCPI: conforming [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:OFFSet[1|2]:PHASe This command defines the phase offset. [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:OFFSet[1|2]:PHASe Syntax: "CORR:OFFS:PHAS 23" Example: *RST value: Features: SCPI: conforming [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:STATe This command switches the system error correction of the current channel on or off. Syntax: [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:STATe "CORR:STAT ON"...
Page 640 SENSe Subsystem The table below shows the correction terms available for the calibration methods: Calibration Method Available Correction Terms Trans Norm Forward SCORR6 Trans Norm Reverse SCORR12 Trans Norm both Directions SCORR6, SCORR12 Refl Norm P1 SCORR3 Refl Norm P2 SCORR9 Refl Norm both Ports SCORR3, SCORR9...
Page 641 SENSe Subsystem [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:POWer:DATA This command is used for reading and writing power correction values for a receiver channel. The <string> parameter may assume the following values: "B1" Correction data for wave b1 at port 1 "INPUTB1" Correction data for wave b1 at input b1 "B2"...
Page 642: Sense:detector Subsystem
SENSe Subsystem 3.6.14.4 SENSe:DETector Subsystem Das SENSe:DETector-subsystem controls how the analyzer takes measurement data. COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT [SENSe<1..4>] :DETector [:FUNCtion] FAST | NORMal [SENSe[1...4]:]DETector[:FUNCtion] This command switches the fast measurement mode on and off. Syntax: [SENSe[1...4]:]DETector[:FUNCtion] "DET FAST" Example: *RST value: NORMal Features:...
Page 643: Sense:frequency Subsystem
The SENSe:FREQuency subsystem controls the frequency abscissa of the active display. The frequency abscissa can either be defined via the start/stop frequency or via the center frequency and span. The following frequency ranges apply to the different instrument models. SENSe:FREQuency: ZVR, ZVRE, ZVRL ZVC, ZVCE internal mode external mode SOURce:FREQuency:...
Page 644 SENSe Subsystem [SENSe[1 to 4]:]FREQuency:CENTer This command defines the center frequency of the analyzer. Syntax: [SENSe[1 to 4]:]FREQuency:CENTer <numeric_value> <numeric value> ::= model-dependent range (see table at the beginning of this subsystem) Example: "FREQ:CENT 100MHz" Features: *RST value: – SCPI: conforming [SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN This command defines the frequency span of the analyzer.
Page 645 SENSe Subsystem [SENSe[1...4]:]FREQuency:MODE This command determines which command groups are used for setting the frequency of the analyzer. Syntax: [SENSe[1...4]:]FREQuency:MODE CW | FIXed | SWEep | SEGMent Example: "FREQ:MODE SWE" Features: *RST value: SCPI: conforming For CW and FIXed, the frequency setting is via command FREQuency:CW. In the SWEep mode, the setting is via the commands FREQuency:STARt, STOP, CENTer and SPAN.
Page 646 SENSe Subsystem [SENSe[1...4]:]FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:FUNDamental For mixer measurements, this command selects the fundamental frequency out of the three mixer frequencies. . Syntax: [SENSe[1...4]:]FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:FUNDamental RF | LO | IF "FREQ:CONV:MIX:FUND RF" Example: *RST value: Features: SCPI: device-specific [SENSe[1...4]:]FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:LOEXternal This command selects one of the two external signal sources as a local oscillator. [SENSe[1...4]:]FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:LOEXternal SOURCE1 | Syntax:...
Page 647 SENSe Subsystem [SENSe[1...4]:]FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:TFRequency. This command determines the sign of the third mixer frequency by selecting either the lower or upper band. Syntax: [SENSe[1...4]:]FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:TFRequency BAND1 | BAND2 "FREQ:CONV:MIX:TFR BAND2" Example: Features: *RST value: BAND1 SCPI: device-specific [SENSe[1...4]:]FREQuency:NLINear:COMP:STIMe This command defines a settling time to be inserted between the generator setting and the start of data aquisition for a compression point measurement.
Page 648: Sense:function Subsystem
SENSe Subsystem 3.6.14.6 SENSe:FUNCtion Subsystem The SENSe:FUNCtion-Subsystem defines the measurement function performed by the analyzer. COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT [SENSe<1..4>] :FUNCtion [:ON] <string> [SENSe[1...4]:]FUNCtion[:ON] This command defines the measurement function performed by the analyzer in one string. Syntax: [SENSe[1...4]:]FUNCtion[:ON] <string> <string>...
Page 649 SENSe Subsystem "XFRequency:NLINear:TOI:CHECk:LEVel ON | OFF" "XFRequency:NLINear:TOI:CHECk:IPNoise ON | OFF" "XFRequency:NLINear:TOI:CHECk:CUBic ON | OFF" "XFRequency:NLINear:TOI:CHECk:RIMod ON | OFF" "XFRequency:NLINear:TOI:CHECk:COMP ON | OFF" "XFRequency:NLINear:TOI:CHECk:ESRC ON | OFF" "XPOWer:POWer:A<1|2>" "XPOWer:POWer:B<1|2>" "XPOWer:POWer:S<11..22>" "XPOWer:POWer:S<11..22>:DEFine B1 | B2 | A1, A1 | B1 | B2" "XPOWer:POWer:Z<11..22>"...
Page 650: Sense:roscillator - Subsystem
SENSe Subsystem 3.6.14.7 SENSe:ROSCillator - Subsystem Dieses Subsystem controls the reference oscillator. COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT [SENSe] :ROSCillator [:SOURce] INTernal | EXTernal :EXTernal FREQuency <numeric_value> [SENSe:]ROSCillator[:SOURce] This command selects the reference oscillator.. [SENSe:]ROSCillator[:SOURce] INTernal | EXTernal Syntax: "ROSC:SOUR EXT" Example: Features: *RST value: SCPI:...
Page 651: Sense:segment Subsystem
SENSe Subsystem 3.6.14.8 SENSe:SEGMent Subsystem The SENSe:SEGMent-Subsystem defines the parameter for a segmented sweep. COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT [SENSe<1..4>] :SEGMent :DEFine<1...50> <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, dBm, <numeric_value> | AUTO, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, [POSitive | NEGative] :CLEar no query :INSert<1...50> <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, dBm,...
Page 652 SENSe Subsystem [SENSe[1...4]:]SEGMent:CLEar This command deletes all segments Syntax: [SENSe[1...4]:]SEGMent:CLEar "SEG:CLE" Example: *RST value: Features: SCPI: device-specific This command is an event, which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query. [SENSe[1...4]:]SEGMent:INSert[1...50] This command inserts a segment into an existing list. Syntax: [SENSe[1...4]:]SEGMent:INSert[1...50] numeric_value>,<numeric_value>,...
Page 653: Sense:sweep Subsystem
SENSe Subsystem 3.6.14.9 SENSe:SWEep Subsystem This subsystem controls the sweep parameters. COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT [SENSe<1..4>] :SWEep :TIME <numeric_value> :AUTO <Boolean> :COUNt <numeric_value> :POINts <numeric_value> :SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic :STEP <numeric_value> :PDECade <numeric_value> :DIRection UP | DOWN [SENSe[1 to 4]:]SWEep:TIME This command defines the duration of the sweep.
Page 654 SENSe Subsystem [SENSe[1 to 4]:]SWEep:POINts This command defines the number of measured points in one sweep. Syntax: [SENSe[1 to 4]:]SWEep:POINts <numeric_value> <numeric_value>::= 1... 2001 Example: "SWE:POIN 10" Features: *RST value: SCPI: conforming [SENSe[1 to 4]:]SWEep:SPACing This command switches over between linear and logarithmic sweep. Syntax: [SENSe[1 to 4]:]SWEep:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic Example:...
Page 655: 15Source Subsystem
SOURce Subsystem 3.6.15 SOURce Subsystem The SOURce subsystem directly controls device-specific settings which are necessary for signal generation. The following value ranges apply to the different instrument models: SOURce:POWer: ZVR, ZVRE, ZVRL ZVC, ZVCE internal mode external internal external mode...
Page 656 SOURce Subsystem COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT SOURce<1...4> :POWer :CENTer <numeric_value> :SPAN <numeric_value> :STARt <numeric_value> :STOP <numeric_value> :CORRection :DATA <string>, <block> | <numeric_value>... :EXT<1|2> :SWEep <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, <numeric_value>, LIN | LOG :NREadings <numeric_value> [:ACQuire] A1 | A2 | ESRC1 | ESRC2 no query :LLISt <numeric_value>,...
Page 657 SOURce Subsystem SOURce<1...4>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:CAMPlitude:A<1|2> This command defines the level of the output signal a1 / a2 when the power correction is switched on or when a power calibration is started. Syntax: SOURce<1...4>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]: <numeric_value> CAMPlitude:A<1|2> <numeric_value>::= -300dBm...+200dBm "SOUR:POW:CAMP:A1 -10dBm" Example: Features: *RST value: 0 dBm SCPI: conforming...
Page 658 SOURce Subsystem SOURce[1...4]: POWer:ALC[:STATe] This command is for controlling the ALC loop of the analyzer. With ON the internal ALC loop is closed, with OFF an external control signal fed via a rear-panel connector is used. The channel specification (1 to 4) is of no importance here since this is a global setting. SOURce[1...4]: POWer:ALC[:STATe] ON | OFF Syntax:...
Page 659 SOURce Subsystem SOURce[1...4]:POWer:NLINear:SOI:RANGe:LOWer This command defines a lower limit for the power of the signal sources for a 2 order intercept point measurement. The allowed range of lower limits depends on the power of the signal sources. With power calibration, the lower limit must be set such that it can be reached by both signal sources.
Page 660 SOURce Subsystem SOURce<1...4>: POWer:SPAN This command defines the level display range of the analyzer in the level sweep mode. Syntax: SOURce<1...4>: POWer:SPAN <numeric_value> <numeric value> ::= 0dBm to 25 dB (device-specific) "SOUR:POW:SPAN 10dB" Example: Features: *RST value: MAXimum SCPI: conforming SOURce<1...4>: POWer:STARt This command defines the start level in the level sweep mode.
Page 661 SOURce Subsystem SOURce<1...4>: POWer:CORRection:EXT<1|2>:SWEep This command defines the sweep parameters to be used when an external generator power calibration is started. Syntax: SOURce<1...4>:POWer: <numeric_value>,<numeric_value> CORRection:EXT<1|2>:SWEep ,<numeric_value>, LIN | LOG "SOUR:POW:CORR:EXT1:SWE 10MHZ,1GHZ,101,LOG" Example: Features: *RST value: .., .., 101, LIN (Start / Stop depending on external generator) SCPI: conforming The parameters are sorted as follows:...
Page 662 SOURce Subsystem SOURce<1...4>: POWer:CORRection:LLISt:STATe This command defines whether the power loss list should be used for a power calibration. Syntax: SOURce<1...4>:POWer:CORRection:LLISt:STATe ON | OFF "SOUR:POW:CORR:LLIS:STAT ON" Example: *RST value: Features: SCPI: conforming SOURce<1...4>:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed] This command defines the CW-frequency for the POWER SWEEP and TIME SWEEP modes. SOURce<1...4>: FREQuency[:CW|FIXed] <numeric_value>...
Page 663 SOURce Subsystem SOURce[1...4]:FREQuency:NLINear:COMP This command specifies whether the internal signal source or one of the two external sources is to be used for the compression point measurement. Syntax: SOURce[1...4]:FREQuency:NLINear:COMP INT | ESRC1 | ESRC2 "SOUR:FREQ:NLIN:COMP INT" Example: *RST value: Features: SCPI: device-specific SOURce[1...4]:FREQuency:NLINear:SOI...
Page 664: 16Status Subsystem
STATus Subsystem 3.6.16 STATus Subsystem The STATus subsystem contains the commands for the status-reporting system (see Section 3.8, Status Reporting System"). *RST does not influence the status registers. COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT STATus :OPERation [:EVENt?] :CONDition? :ENABle 0...65535 :PTRansition 0...65535 :NTRansition 0...65535 :PRESet...
Page 665 STATus Subsystem STATus:OPERation:CONDition? This command queries the CONDition section of the STATus:OPERation register. Syntax: STATus:OPERation:CONDition? Example: "STAT:OPER:COND?" Features: *RST value: – SCPI: conforming Readout does not delete the contents of the CONDition section. The value returned reflects the current hardware status. STATus:OPERation:ENABle This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the STATus:QUEStionable register.
Page 666 STATus Subsystem STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt?] This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus:QUEStionable register. Syntax: STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt?] Example: "STAT:QUES?" Features: *RST value: – SCPI: conforming Readout deletes the contents of the EVENt section. STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition? This command queries the CONDition section of the STATus:QUEStionable register. Syntax: STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition? Example:...
Page 667 STATus Subsystem STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt?] This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register. Syntax: STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt?] "STAT:QUES:FREQ?" Example: *RST value: Characteristics: SCPI: device-specific The contents of the EVENt section are cleared on reading out. STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition? This command queries the CONDition section of the STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register. Syntax: STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition? "STAT:QUES:FREQ:COND?"...
Page 668 STATus Subsystem STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit[:EVENt?] This command queries the contents of the EVENt-section of the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit- register. Syntax: STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit[:EVENt?] "STAT:QUES:LIM?" Example: *RST value: – Features: SCPI: device-specific Readout deletes the contents of the EVENt section. STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:CONDition? This command queries the CONDition-section of the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit-register. Syntax: STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:CONDition? "STAT:QUES:LIM:COND?"...
Page 669 STATus Subsystem STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt?] This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus:QUEStionable:POWer- register. Syntax: STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt?] "STAT:QUES:POW?" Example: *RST value: – Characteristics: SCPI: device-specific The contents of the EVENt section are cleared on reading out. STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition? This command queries the CONDition section of the STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register. Syntax: STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition? "STAT:QUES:POW:COND?"...
Page 670 STATus Subsystem STATus:QUEue[:NEXT?] This command queries the earliest entry to the error queue, thus deleting it. Syntax: STATus:QUEue[:NEXT?] Example: "STAT:QUE?" Features: *RST value: – SCPI: conforming Positive error numbers indicate device-specific errors, negative error numbers are error messages defined by SCPI (cf. Appendix B). If the error queue is empty, the error number 0, "no error", is returned.
Page 671: 17System Subsystem
SYSTem Subsystem 3.6.17 SYSTem Subsystem The SYSTem subsystem lists commands for general functions. COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT SYSTem :COMMunicate :AKAL [:STATe] <Boolean> :GPIB [:SELF] :ADDRess 0...30 :RTERminator LFEoi | EOI :RDEVice [:PRINter<1|2>] :ADDRess 0...30 :GENerator<1|2> :ADDRess 0...30 :PMETer :ADDRess 0...30 :RDEVice :GENerator<1|2>...
Page 672 SYSTem Subsystem COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT :PRESet :SET <block> :TIME 0...23, 0...59, 0...59 :VERSion? query only SYSTem:COMMunicate:AKAL[:STATe] This command switches the control of the AutoKal box on and off. Syntax: SYSTem:COMMunicate:AKAL[:STATe] ON | OFF "SYST:COMM:AKAL ON" Example: *RST value: – (no influence on this parameter) Features: SCPI: device-specific...
Page 673 SYSTem Subsystem SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RDEVice:GENerator<1|2>:ADDRess This command changes the IEC-bus address of the device selected as generator no. 1 or 2. Syntax: SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RDEVice:GENerator<1|2>: ADDRess 0...30 "SYST:COMM:GPIB:RDEV:GENerator1:ADDR 19" Example: *RST value: Features: SCPI: device-specific SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RDEVice:PMETer:ADDRess This command changes the IEC-bus address of the device selected as power meter. Syntax: SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RDEVice:PMETer:ADDRess 0...30...
Page 674 SYSTem Subsystem SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter<1|2>:SELect <printer_name> This command selects one of the printers installed under Windows NT. The numeric suffix in PRINter<1|2> selects the device. The name of the first printer is queried with FIRSt?. After that the names of other installed printers can be queried with NEXT?.
Page 675 SYSTem Subsystem SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<1|2>:TYPE This command selects the type of external generator. Syntax: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<1|2>:TYPE <name> <name>::= ’HP8340A’ | ’HP_ESG’ | ’HP_ESG_B’ | ’SME02’ | ’SME03’ | ’SME06’ | ’SMG’ | ’SMGL’ | ’SMGU’ | ’SMH’ | ’SMHU’ | ’SMIQ02’ | ’SMIQ02E’ | ’SMIQ03’...
Page 676 SYSTem Subsystem SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer:CFACtor:ASENsor This command defines the sensor factor list for sensor A which can be active for a power calibration. SYSTem:COMMunicate: <numeric_value>,<numeric_value>, Syntax: RDEVice:PMETer:CFACtor:ASENsor <numeric_value> ... "SYST:COMM:RDEV:PMET:CFAC:ASEN 2,10HZ,99PCT,4GHZ,98PCT" Example: *RST value: 0 (i.e. sensor factor list empty) Features: SCPI: conforming The parameters are sorted as follows: number of following (frequency, factor) pairs (0 ..
Page 677 SYSTem Subsystem SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial<1|2>:CONTrol:DTR SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial<1|2>:CONTrol:RTS These commands switch the hardware handshake procedure for the given serial interface off (OFF) or on (IBFull). Syntax: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial<1|2>:CONTrol:DTR IBFull | OFF SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial<1|2>:CONTrol:RTS IBFull | OFF Examples: "SYST:COMM:SER:CONT:DTR OFF" "SYST:COMM:SER2:CONT:RTS IBF" Features: *RST value: SCPI: conforming The two commands have the same meaning.
Page 678 SYSTem Subsystem SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial<1|2>[:RECeive]:SBITs This command defines the number of stopbits per data word for the given serial interface. Syntax: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial<1|2>[:RECeive]:SBITs 1|2 Example: "SYST:COMM:SER:SBITs 2" Features: *RST value: SCPI: conforming SERial1 and SERial 2 correspond to device interface COM1 and COM2, respectively. SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial<1|2>[:RECeive]:PACE This command switches on or off the software handshake for the given serial interface.
Page 679 SYSTem Subsystem SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? This command queries and at the same time deletes the oldest entry in the error queue. Syntax: SYSTem:ERRor? Example: "SYST:ERR?" Features: *RST value: – SCPI: conforming Positive error numbers indicate device-specific errors, negative error numbers are error messages defined by SCPI (cf.
Page 680 SYSTem Subsystem SYSTem:PRESet This command triggers an instrument reset. Syntax: SYSTem:PRESet Example: "SYST:PRES" Features: *RST value: – SCPI: conforming The effect of this command corresponds to that of the PRESET key for manual control or to the *RST command. SYSTem:SET This command loads the instrument setting previously stored via SYSTem:SET?.
Page 681: 18Trace Subsystem
TRACe Subsystem 3.6.18 TRACe Subsystem The TRACe subsystem controls access to the instrument’s internal trace memory. COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT TRACe :COPY MDATA1 | MDATA2 | MDATA3 | MDATA4 | no query MDATA5 | MDATA6 | MDATA7 | MDATA8, CH1DATA | CH2DATA | CH3DATA | CH4DATA :CLEar MDATA1 | MDATA2 | MDATA3 | MDATA4 |...
Page 682 TRACe Subsystem TRACe:COPY This command copies the trace data of the active channel to one of the 8 memory traces. Syntax: TRACe:COPY <memory_name>,<trace_name> <memory_name>::= MDATA1 | MDATA2 | MDATA3 | MDATA4 | MDATA5 | MDATA6 | MDATA7 | MDATA8 <trace_name>::= CH1DATA | CH2DATA | CH3DATA | CH4DATA Examples: "TRAC:COPY MDATA5,CH1DATA"...
Page 683 TRACe Subsystem TRACe[:DATA][:RESPonse]:BODY? This query command reads the response values of the trace data from the device. With binary data transmission, these are only the useful data without the SCPI block data header. Syntax: TRACe[:DATA][:RESPonse]:BODY? CH1DATA | CH2DATA | CH3DATA | CH4DATA | CH1MEM | CH2MEM | CH3MEM | CH4MEM | MDATA1 | MDATA2 | MDATA3 | MDATA4 | MDATA5...
Page 684 TRACe Subsystem TRACe:FEED This command transfers data from the internal memory traces to the channel specific memories for measured values. Syntax: TRACe:FEED CH1MEM | CH2MEM | CH3MEM | CH4MEM [, MDATA1 | MDATA2 | MDATA3 | MDATA4 | MDATA5 | MDATA6 | MDATA7 | MDATA8] "TRAC:COPY CH1MEM,MDAT5"...
Page 685: 19Trigger-Subsystem
TRIGger-Subsystem 3.6.19 TRIGger-Subsystem The TRIGger subsystem is used to synchronize tasks performed by the instrument and events. This allows to control and synchronize the start of a sweep. An external trigger signal can be applied to the rear panel connector. COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT...
Page 686 TRIGger-Subsystem TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff This command defines the length of the trigger delay. TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff <numeric value> Syntax: <numeric_value> ::= 0...100s. "TRIG:HOLD 500us" Example: *RST value: Features: SCPI: conforming TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe This command selects the edge of the trigger signal. Syntax: TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe POSitive | NEGative "TRIG:SLOP NEG"...
Page 687: Instrument Model And Command Processing
Instrument Model and Command Processing 3.7 Instrument Model and Command Processing The model shown in Fig. 3-2 visualizes the instrument from the point of view of servicing IEC-bus commands. The individual components work independent of each other and simultaneously. They communicate with each other by means of so-called "messages".
Page 688: Command Recognition
Instrument Model and Command Processing 3.7.2 Command Recognition The command recognition analyses the data received from the input unit. It proceeds in the order in which it receives the data. Only a DCL is serviced with priority, a GET (Group Execute Trigger), e.g., is only executed after the commands received before as well.
Page 689: Output Unit
Instrument Model and Command Processing 3.7.5 Output Unit The output unit collects the information requested by the controller, which it receives from the data set management. It processes it according to the SCPI rules and makes it available in the output buffer. The output buffer has a size of 4096 characters.
Page 690: Status Reporting System
Status Reporting System 3.8 Status Reporting System The status reporting system (cf. Fig. 3-4) stores all information on the present operating state of the instrument, e.g. that the instrument presently carries out an AUTORANGE and on errors which have occurred. This information is stored in the status registers and in the error queue. The status registers and the error queue can be queried via IEC bus.
Page 691 Status Reporting System CONDition part The CONDition part is directly written into by the hardware or the sum bit of the next lower register. Its contents reflects the current instrument status. This register part can only be read, but not written into or cleared. Its contents is not affected by reading.
Page 692 Status Reporting System 3.8.2 Overview of the Status Registers not used -&- PROGram running -&- INSTrument summary bit -&- not used -&- -&- not used not used -&- -&- not used -&- not used -&- CORRecting -&- W AIT for ARM W AIT for TRIGGER -&- -&-...
Page 693: Description Of The Status Registers
Status Reporting System 3.8.3 Description of the Status Registers 3.8.3.1 Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE) The STB is already defined in IEEE 488.2. It provides a rough overview of the instrument status by collecting the pieces of information of the lower registers. It can thus be compared with the CONDition part of an SCPI register and assumes the highest level within the SCPI hierarchy.
Page 694: Ist Flag And Parallel Poll Enable Register (Ppe)
Status Reporting System 3.8.3.2 IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register (PPE) By analogy with the SRQ, the IST flag combines the entire status information in a single bit. It can be queried by means of a parallel poll (cf. Section 3.8.4.3) or using command "*IST?". The parallel poll enable register (PPE) determines which bits of the STB contribute to the IST flag.
Page 695: Status:operation Register
Status Reporting System 3.8.3.4 STATus:OPERation Register In the CONDition part, this register contains information on which actions the instrument is being executing or, in the EVENt part, information on which actions the instrument has executed since the last reading. read using commands "STATus:OPERation:CONDition?"...
Page 696: Status:questionable-Register
Status Reporting System 3.8.3.5 STATus:QUEStionable-Register This register contains information on questionable instrument states. Such states can occur, e.g. if the instrument operated outside specifications. read using commands STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition? or STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]? Table 3-5 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable register Bit No.
Page 697: Status:questionable:limit Register
Status Reporting System 3.8.3.6 STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit Register This register provides information about whether a limit value (upper limit, lower limit) for one of the memory traces (Trace 1, ... Trace 4) is exceeded. The register can be queried with the commands STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit[:EVENt?] and STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:CONDition?.
Page 698: Application Of The Status Reporting System
Status Reporting System 3.8.4 Application of the Status Reporting System In order to be able to effectively use the status reporting system, the information contained there must be transmitted to the controller and further processed there. There are several methods which are represented in the following.
Page 699: Parallel Poll
Status Reporting System 3.8.4.3 Parallel Poll In a parallel poll, up to eight instruments are simultaneously requested by the controller by means of a single command to transmit 1 bit of information each on the data lines, i.e., to set the data line allocated to each instrument to logically "0"...
Page 700: Reset Values Of The Status Reporting System
Status Reporting System 3.8.5 Reset Values of the Status Reporting System Table 3-7 comprises the different commands and events causing the status reporting system to be reset. None of the commands, except for *RST and SYSTem:PRESet influences the functional instrument settings. In particular, DCL does not change the instrument settings. Table 3-7 Resettting instrument functions Event...
Page 701: Softkeys And Related Iec/Ieee Bus Commands
Softkeys – IEC/IEEE-bus-commands Softkeys and Related IEC/IEEE BUS Commands The following list contains the IEC/IEEE-bus commands of the ZVR arranged according to the softkey menu structure (Section 2.2). Submenus are visualized by indentations. The function of the softkeys is described in Chapter 2, Manual Operation (for page numbers refer to the alphabetical softkey list – keyword "Softkey"...
Page 702 Softkeys – IEC/IEEE-bus-commands CALCulate:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs KFSTop KEEP STOP FREQ CALCulate:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs KDFRequency KEEP FREQ STEP WIDTH CALCulate:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs MINStep USE MIN STEP WIDTH CALCulate:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs:DCSPara <numeric_value> LOWPASS DC S-PARAM CALCulate:TRANsform:TIME:WINDow RECT PROFILING CALCulate:TRANsform:TIME:WINDow HAMMing LOW FIRST SIDELOBE CALCulate:TRANsform:TIME:WINDow HANNing NORMAL PROFILE CALCulate:TRANsform:TIME:WINDow BOHMan STEEP FALLOFF CALCulate:TRANsform:TIME:WINDow DCHebychev ARBITRARY...
Page 703 Softkeys – IEC/IEEE-bus-commands MIXER MEAS SENSe[1...4]:FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:FUNDamental BASE FREQ SENSe[1...4]:FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:FUNDamental BASE FREQ SENSe[1...4]:FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:FUNDamental BASE FREQ SENSe[1...4]:FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:LOEXternal SOURce1|SOURce2 LO EXT SRC1/SRC2 SENSe[1...4]:FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:RFFixed <numeric_value> FIXED RF SENSe[1...4]:FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:LOFixed <numeric_value> FIXED LO SENSe[1...4]:FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:IFFixed <numeric_value> FIXED IF SENSe[1...4]:FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:TFRequency BAND1|BAND2 SEL BAND – SENSe[1..4]:FREQuency:CONVersion ARBitrary ARBITRARY –– ARBITRARY SENSe[1..4]:FREQuency:CONVersion:ARBitrary ARBITRARY...
Page 704 Softkeys – IEC/IEEE-bus-commands SOURce[1..4]:FREQuency:NLINear:COMP INT INT SRC SOURce[1..4]:FREQuency:NLINear:COMP ESRC1 EXT SRC1 SOURce[1..4]:FREQuency:NLINear:COMP ESRC2 EXT SRC2 SENSe[1..4]:FUNCtion[:ON] ‘XFRequency:NLINear SOI’ DEF SOI MEAS SOURce[1..4]:POWer:NLINear:SOI:RANGe:UPPer <numeric_value> SRC POWER MAX LIMIT SOURce[1..4]:POWer:NLINear:SOI:RANGe:LOWer <numeric_value> SRC POWER MIN LIMIT SENSe[1..4]:FREQuency:NLINear:SOI:STIMe <numeric_value> SETTLING TIME SENSe[1..4]:FUNCtion[:ON] ‘XFRequency:NLINear:SOI:IPOint INP | OUTP' INTC POINT INP/OUTP SOURce[1..4]:FREQuency:NLINear:SOI:OFFSet <numeric_value>...
Page 705 Softkeys – IEC/IEEE-bus-commands SWEEP MODE SENSe[1..4]:FUNCtion[:ON] ‘XFR:POW:...’ FREQUENCY SWEEP SENSe[1..4]:FUNCtion[:ON] ‘XTIM:POW:...’ TIME SWEEP SENSe[1..4]:FUNCtion[:ON] ‘XPOW:POW:...’ POWER SWEEP SENSe[1..4]:DETector:[FUNCtion] FAST | NORMAL FAST MODE SETUP GENERAL SETUP SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess 0...30 GPIB ADDRESS INPut:UPORt<1|2>[:VALue]? USER INPut:UPORt<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF PORT A OUTPut[:STATe] ON | OFF OUTPut:UPORt<1|2>[:VALue] <Binary>...
Page 706 Softkeys – IEC/IEEE-bus-commands DIAGnostic:SERVice:FUNCtion <num>,<num>,<num>,<num>,<num> SERVICE FUNCTION SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable] <string> ENTER PASSWORD INFO *IDN? FIRMWARE VERSIONS *OPT? HARDWARE + OPTIONS 1043.0009.50 3.165 E-15...
Page 707: Copy Key Group
Softkeys – IEC/IEEE-bus-commands 3.9.2 COPY Key Group HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>] COPY SETTINGS HCOPy:ITEM:ALL COPY SCREEN HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1...4><1|2>:TRACe:STATe ON | OFF COPY TRACE COPY MEM TRACE HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1...4><1|2>:TABle:STATe ON | OFF COPY TABLE SELECT QUADRANT HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant 1 UPPER LEFT HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant 2 LOWER LEFT HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant 3 UPPER RIGHT HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant 4...
Page 708: Memory Key Group
Softkeys – IEC/IEEE-bus-commands 3.9.3 MEMORY Key Group CONFIG MMEMory:MSIS <device> EDIT MMEMory:CDIRectory <directory_name> PATH MMEMory:COPY <file_source>,<file_destination> COPY MMEMory:DELete <file_name> DELETE MMEMory:RDIRectory <directory_name> MMEMory:MOVE <file_source>,<file_destination> RENAME MMEMory:MDIRectory <directory_name> MAKE DIRECTORY MMEMory:INITialize <msus> FORMAT DISK SAVE MMEMory:STORe:STATe 1,<file_name> EDIT NAME MMEMory:CDIRectory <string> EDIT PATH MMEMory:CDIRectory ‘A:\’...
Page 709 Softkeys – IEC/IEEE-bus-commands PAGE UP PAGE DOWN MMEMory:COMMent <string> EDIT COMMENT ASCII FILE FORMat:DEXport ASCii ASCII FORMat:DEXport TOUChstone TOUCHSTONE FORMat:DEXport SCOMpact SUPER COMPACT FORMat:DEXport:FORMat COMPlex REAL AND IMAGINARY FORMat:DEXport:FORMat MLPHase LIN MAG AND PHASE FORMat:DEXport:FORMat MDPHase dB MAG AND PHASE FORMat:DEXport:MODe NEW | APPend APEND FORMat:DEXport:DSEParator POINt | COMMa...
Page 710: Status Key Group
Softkeys – IEC/IEEE-bus-commands RECALL MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 1,<file_name> EDIT NAME MMEMory:CDIRectory ‘A:\’ SET PATH A:\... MMEMory:CDIRectory ‘C:\’ SET PATH C:\... SEL ITEMS TO RECALL MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL ENABLE ALL ITEMS MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE DISABLE ALL ITEMS MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault DEFAULT CONFIG MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO 1,<file_name> AUTO RECALL 3.9.4 STATUS Key Group Gerätenachricht "Go to LOCAL (GTL)"...
Page 711: Stimulus Key Group
Softkeys – IEC/IEEE-bus-commands 3.9.5 STIMULUS Key Group (Frequenzsweep) SENSe[1..4]:FREQuency:STARt <numeric_value> START (Leistungssweep) SOURCe[1..4]:POWer:STARt <numeric_value> (Frequenzsweep) SENSe[1..4]:FREQuency:STOP <numeric_value> STOP (Leistungssweep) SOURCe[1..4]:POWer:STOP <numeric_value> (Frequenzsweep) SENSe[1..4]:FREQuency:CENTer <numeric_value> CENTER (Leistungssweep) SOURCe[1..4]:POWer:CENTer <numeric_value> (Frequenzsweep) SENSe[1..4]:FREQuency:SPAN <numeric_value> SPAN (Leistungssweep) SOURCe[1..4]:POWer:SPAN <numeric_value> 3.9.6 SWEEP Key Group SWEEP SENSe[1..4]:FREQuency:MODE CW|FIXED SINGLE POINT...
Page 712 Softkeys – IEC/IEEE-bus-commands DEF TRIGGER TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce IMMediate IMMEDIATE TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce EXTernal EXTERNAL TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce LINE LINE TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce TIMer PERIODIC TIMER TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce RTCLock REAL TIME CLOCK TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce MANual MANUAL *TRG MANUAL TRIGGER TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff <numeric_value> TRIGGER DELAY TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LINK 'SWEEP‘ ‚POINt‘ TRIGGER SWEEP/POINT TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe POSitive|NEGative SLOPE POS/NEG TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TIMer <numeric_value>...
Page 713 Softkeys – IEC/IEEE-bus-commands SOURCE SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] <numeric_value> POWER SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:SLOPe <numeric_value> SLOPE SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:CAMPlitude:A1 <numeric_value> a1 POWER SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:CAMPlitude:A2 <numeric_value> a2 POWER OUTPut1:ATTenuation <numeric_value> STEP ATT a1 INPut1:ATTenuation <numeric_value> STEP ATT b1 INPut2:ATTenuation <numeric_value> STEP ATT b2 OUTPut2:ATTenuation <numeric_value> STEP ATT a2 OUTPut1:ATTenuation <numeric_value> STEP ATT a1 AND a2 SOURce:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed]...
Page 714: Marker Key Group
Softkeys – IEC/IEEE-bus-commands SENSe[1..4]:AVERage:CLEar AVERAGE RESTART [SENSe[1...4]:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <numeric_value> BANDWIDTH 3.9.7 MARKER Key Group MARKER CALCulate[1..4]:MARKer[1..8]:X <numeric_value> MARKER 1..8 CALCulate[1..4]:MARKer[1..8]:TRACe CHDATA|CHMEM MARKER DATA/MEM CALCulate[1..4]:MARKer[1..8]:COUPled[:STATe] ON | OFF COUPLED MARKERS MARKER CONVERS CALCulate[1..4]:MARKer[1..8]:TRANsform:COMPlex S CALCulate[1..4]:MARKer[1..8]:TRANsform:COMPlex SINV CALCulate[1..4]:MARKer[1..8]:TRANsform:COMPlex Z CALCulate[1..4]:MARKer[1..8]:TRANsform:COMPlex ZREL Z/Z0 CALCulate[1..4]:MARKer[1..8]:TRANsform:COMPlex Y CALCulate[1..4]:MARKer[1..8]:TRANsform:COMPlex YREL Y/Y0 MARKER...
Page 715 Softkeys – IEC/IEEE-bus-commands CALCulate[1..4]:MARKer[1..8]:FORMat GDELay GROUP DELAY CALCulate[1..4]:MARKer[1..8]:FORMat MLPHase LIN MAG AND PHASE CALCulate[1..4]:MARKer[1..8]:FORMat MDPHase dB MAG AND PHASE CALCulate[1..4]:MARKer[1..8]:FORMat COMPlex REAL AND IMAGINARY CALCulate[1..4]:MARKer[1..8]:FORMat L CALCulate[1..4]:MARKer[1..8]:FORMat C CALCulate[1..4]:MARKer[1..8]:FORMat RLC ELEMENTS CALCulate[1..4]:MARKer[1..8]:AOFF ALL MARKER CALCulate[1..4]:MARKer[1..8]:MODE CONTinuous|DISCrete MARKER CONT/DISCR SEARCH CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:SEARch [:IMMediate] SEARCH CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:SEARch:NEXT SEARCH...
Page 716 Softkeys – IEC/IEEE-bus-commands DEFINE B’DFILTER CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:BWIDth:MODE BPASs BANDPASS CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:BWIDth:MODE BSTOp BANDSTOP CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:BWIDth <numeric_value> WIDTH CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:QFACtor QUALITY FACTOR CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:SFACtor SHAPE FACT 60dB / 3dB <numeric_value>,<numeric_value> CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:SFACtor SHAPE FACT <numeric_value>,<numeric_value> 60dB / 6dB DELTA ∆ REF= CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:DELTa:REFerence MARKer1 MARKER 1 CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:DELTa:REFerence FIXed ∆...
Page 717 Softkeys – IEC/IEEE-bus-commands 3.9.8 CHANNEL Key Group INSTrument[:SELect] CHANNEL<1..4> CH1..CH4 3.9.9 RESPONSE Key Group MEAS [SENSe[1...4]:]FUNCtion[:ON] "XFR:POW:S11" REFL PORT1 [SENSe[1...4]:]FUNCtion[:ON] "XPOW:POW:S11" [SENSe[1...4]:]FUNCtion[:ON] "XTIM:POW:S11" [SENSe[1...4]:]FUNCtion[:ON] "XFR:POW:S21" TRANS FWD [SENSe[1...4]:]FUNCtion[:ON] "XPOW:POW:S21" [SENSe[1...4]:]FUNCtion[:ON] "XTIM:POW:S21" [SENSe[1...4]:]FUNCtion[:ON] "XFR:POW:S12" [SENSe[1...4]:]FUNCtion[:ON] "XPOW:POW:S12" TRANS REV [SENSe[1...4]:]FUNCtion[:ON] "XTIM:POW:S12" [SENSe[1...4]:]FUNCtion[:ON] "XFR:POW:S22"...
Page 718 Softkeys – IEC/IEEE-bus-commands COMPLEX CONVERS CALCulate[1...4]:TRANsform:COMPlex CALCulate[1...4]:TRANsform:COMPlex SINV CALCulate[1...4]:TRANsform:COMPlex ZREL Z/Z0 CALCulate[1...4]:TRANsform:COMPlex CALCulate[1...4]:TRANsform:COMPlex YREL Y/Y0 CALCulate[1...4]:TRANsform:COMPlex [SENSe[1...4]:]FUNCtion[:ON] "XFRequency:POWer:KFACtor" K-FACTOR [SENSe[1...4]:]FUNCtion[:ON] "XPOWer:POWer:KFACtor" [SENSe[1...4]:]FUNCtion[:ON] "XTIMe:POWer:KFACtor" [SENSe[1...4]:]FUNCtion[:ON] "XFRequency:POWer:MUFactor1" µ1-FACTOR [SENSe[1...4]:]FUNCtion[:ON] "XPOWer:POWer:MUFactor1" [SENSe[1...4]:]FUNCtion[:ON] "XTIMe:POWer:MUFactor1" [SENSe[1...4]:]FUNCtion[:ON] "XFRequency:POWer:MUFactor2" µ2-FACTOR [SENSe[1...4]:]FUNCtion[:ON] "XPOWer:POWer:MUFactor2" [SENSe[1...4]:]FUNCtion[:ON] "XTIMe:POWer:MUFactor2" FORMAT CALCulate[1...4]:FORMat COMPlex COMPLEX CALCulate[1...4]:FORMat MAGNitude MAGNITUDE...
Page 719 Softkeys – IEC/IEEE-bus-commands CALCulate[1...4]:FORMat L CALCulate[1...4]:FORMat C CALCulate[1...4]:FORMat UPHase PHASE UNWRAP SCALE DISPlay[:WINDow[1...4]]:TRACe[1...4]:Y[:SCALe] :AUTO ONCE AUTOSCALE DISPlay[:WINDow[1...4]]:TRACe[1...4]:Y[:SCALe] :PDIVision <numeric_value> SCALE/DIV DISPlay[:WINDow[1...4]]:TRACe[1...4]:Y[:SCALe] :RLEVel <numeric_value> REFERENCE VALUE DISPlay[:WINDow[1...4]]:TRACe[1...4]:Y[:SCALe] :RPOSition 0...100 PCT REFERENCE POSITION DISPlay[:WINDow[1...4]]:TRACe[1...4]:Y[:SCALe] :TOP <numeric_value> MAX VALUE DISPlay[:WINDow[1...4]]:TRACe[1...4]:Y[:SCALe] :BOTTom <numeric_value> MIN VALUE DISPlay[:WINDow[1...4]]:TRACe[1...4]:Y[:SCALe] :OFFSet <numeric_value>...
Page 720 Softkeys – IEC/IEEE-bus-commands DISPlay[:WINDow<1...4>]:DIAGram CHARter CHARTER DISPLAY DISPlay:FORMat SINGle SINGLE CHANNEL DISPlay:FORMat DOVerlay DUAL CHAN OVERLAY DISPlay:FORMat DSPLit DUAL CHAN SPLIT DISPlay:FORMat QOVerlay QUAD CHAN OVERLAY DISPlay:FORMat QDSPlit QUAD CHAN DUAL SPLIT DISPlay:FORMat QQSPlit QUAD CHAN QUAD SPLIT DISPlay:FORMat:EXPand ON|OFF EXPAND TRACE TRACe:COPY...
Page 721 Softkeys – IEC/IEEE-bus-commands 3.9.10 CAL Key Group START NEW CAL FULL TWO PORT PORT 1 CONNECTOR [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect:CONNection[1|2] N50FEMALE N 50 Ω FEMALE [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect:CONNection[1|2] N50MALE N 50 Ω MALE N 75 Ω [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect:CONNection[1|2] N75FEMALE FEMALE N 75 Ω [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect:CONNection[1|2] N75MALE MALE [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect:CONNection[1|2] SMAFEMALE FEMALE [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect:CONNection[1|2] SMAMALE...
Page 722 Softkeys – IEC/IEEE-bus-commands [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] MATCH2 MATCH PORT 2 [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] SLIDE1 SLIDE PORT 1 [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] SLIDE2 SLIDE PORT 2 [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE APPLY [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod TRM [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] THRough THROUGH [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect: ACQuire REFL1 REFLECT PORT 1 [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect: ACQuire REFL2 REFLECT PORT 2 [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] MATCH1 MATCH PORT 1 [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] MATCH2 MATCH...
Page 723 Softkeys – IEC/IEEE-bus-commands [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod TNA [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] THRough THROUGH (TNA) [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] ATT ATTEN [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE APPLY CAL [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod TOSM TOSM [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] THRough THROUGH [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] OPEN1 OPEN PORT 1 [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] OPEN2 OPEN PORT 2 [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] SHORT1 SHORT PORT 1 [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] SHORT2 SHORT PORT 2 [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] MATCH1 MATCH PORT 1...
Page 724 Softkeys – IEC/IEEE-bus-commands [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod FUNDamental AUTOKAL FUNDAM´TAL -- (ZVR, ZVRE, ZVC, ZVCE) FULL ONE PORT [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod FOPORT12 BOTH PORTS [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] OPEN1 OPEN PORT 1 [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] SHORT1 SHORT PORT 1 [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] MATCH1 MATCH PORT 1 [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] OPEN2 OPEN PORT 2 [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] SHORT2...
Page 725 Softkeys – IEC/IEEE-bus-commands (ZVR, ZVRE, ZVC, ZVCE) ONE PATH TWO PORT [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod FOPTport FORWARD [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod ROPTport REVERSE [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] OPEN1 OPEN PORT 1 [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] SHORT1 SHORT PORT 1 [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] MATCH1 MATCH PORT 1 [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] THRough THROUGH [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] OPEN2 OPEN PORT 2 [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] SHORT2...
Page 726 Softkeys – IEC/IEEE-bus-commands TRANS NORM [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod FTRANS FORWARD [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod RTRANS REVERSE [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] THRough THROUGH [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE APPLY CAL --(ZVR, ZVRE, ZVC, ZVCE) REFL NORM [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod REFL12 BOTH PORTS [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod REFL1 PORT 1 [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod REFL2 PORT 2 [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] OPEN1 OPEN PORT 1 [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] OPEN2...
Page 727 Softkeys – IEC/IEEE-bus-commands [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod FTRans TRANS NORM (ZVRL) [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod FOPTport FORWARD [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] THRough THROUGH [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE APPLY CAL [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod REFL1 REFL NORM (ZVRL) [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] OPEN1 OPEN PORT 1 [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE APPLY CAL [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod FTREF1 TRANS AND REFL NORM (ZVRL) [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] OPEN1 OPEN PORT 1 [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] THRough...
Page 728 Softkeys – IEC/IEEE-bus-commands START NEW POWER CAL SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:CAMPlitude:A1 <numeric_value> a1 POWER SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:CAMPlitude:A2 <numeric_value> a2 POWER [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:POWer:ACQuire B1 b1 POWER [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:POWer:ACQuire B2 b2 POWER SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer:TYPe <string> POWER MTR CONFIG SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RDEVice:PMETer:ADDRess <numeric_value> SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer:AZERo:STATe ON | OFF –– SENSOR CAL FACTOR SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer:CFACtor[:SELect] ASENsor | SENSOR A/B BSENsor SOURCe[1...4]:POWer:CORRection:NREadings <numeric_value>...
Page 730: Maintenance And Troubleshooting
Selftest Maintenance and Troubleshooting Maintenance 4.1.1 Mechanical Maintenance The network analyzer does not require any mechanical maintenance. The front panel should be cleaned occasionally using a soft humid cloth. 4.1.2 Electrical Maintenance 4.1.2.1 Testing the Generator Level It is recommended to check the accuracy according to section 5 every two years. If tolerances are exceeded, new recording of the detector characteristics or the level correction data is required (see Service Manual).
Page 731: Monitoring The Function
Selbsttest Monitoring the Function 4.2.1 Switch-on Test After the instrument has been switched on, a self test of the processor functions is performed first. This is followed by initialization of the transputer network, which then controls the analog modules. 4.2.2 Monitoring the Synthesizers and the Level Control Note: The current firmware version doesn’t contain the error messages described below.
Page 732: Function Description Of The Complete Instrument
This allows for phase and group delay measurements during frequency conversion. Instrument versions The function of the test sets of models ZVRE, ZVRE and ZVRL mainly corresponds to that of the test set described above. A main difference is the lower number of reception channels: Whereas the ZVR and ZVC are equipped with four channels, the ZVRE, ZVCE and ZVRL feature only three channels.
Page 733: Front End
The front end of the ZVR and ZVC consists of four identical reception channels (two measurement channels and two reference channels), that of models ZVRE, ZVRL and ZVCE features only three channels (two measurement channels and one reference channel). The models of the ZVR(x) family cover an input frequency range from 10 Hz to 4 GHz, whereas ZVC and ZVCE cover the frequency range from 20 kHz to 8 GHz.
Page 734: Local
Selftest 4.3.1.5 Local The Local module provides the LO signals for the two mixers in the front end channels (LO1 signal for the 1st mixer, LO2 signal for the 2nd mixer). In addition, it contains the reference frequency source from which it generates the reference signal for the synthesizers (Synthesizer modules) and the signal for generation of the sampling signals in the converter modules.
Page 735: Processor Structure
Selbsttest 4.3.3 Processor Structure In addition to a 586 CPU, the network analyzer also comprises three 32-bit transputers T805 and one 16-bit transputer T225. Two DSPs are provided for digital signal processing. The 586 CPU handles the complete data exchange with the peripheral devices, such as e.g. keyboard entry, display of the softkeys and operation via IEC bus.
Page 736: Self Test
Selftest 4.4 Self test The current firmware version does not support an automatic self test yet. However, the necessary hardware facilities are provided and can be used for troubleshooting with the aid of service functions (see Service Manual). Each synthesizer and signal module contains one or two 1-out-of-8 analog multiplexer which selects up to 16 test voltages via buffer amplifier and applies them to the common test channel.
Page 738: Testing The Rated Specifications
Measuring Instruments and Accessories Testing the Rated Specifications Measuring Instruments and Accessories (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Item Type of Instrument Required Specifications Appropriate R&S Order No. Device Modulation analyzer 1 MHz to 4 GHz R&S FMB 856.5005.52 5.2.1.1 Opt.
Page 739: Test Sequence (Zvr, Zvre, Zvrl)
Test Sequence (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Test Sequence (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) The rated specifications of the network analyzer are checked after a warm-up time of at least 30 minutes. This makes sure that the guaranteed data are observed.
Page 740: Spurious Suppression
Test Sequence (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Measurement Set test frequencies according to test report. Measure at twice and three times the test frequency and calculate the difference from the measured value at the test frequency, report the worse of the two values.
Page 741: Phase Noise
Test Sequence (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Measurement: Set test frequencies according to test report. Mixer range up to 750 MHz: LO=RF+fo (fo = test frequency) For fo < 50 MHz RF = 63.125 MHz fo = 50 MHz to < 150 MHz RF = 252.5 MHz...
Page 742: Residual Fm
) or NRV-Z51 with matching pad RAM (75 ). Test setup 50 Connect power sensor to PORT1, PORT2 (only R&S ZVR and R&S ZVRE) or OUTPUTa1 (only with option R&S ZVR-B25, Ext. Measurements) of the network analyzer. Test setup 75 : Connect power sensor with RAM to PORT1 or PORT2 (only R&S ZVR and R&S...
Page 743: Level Linearity
Test Sequence (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) with Opt. B10 Reference -10 dBm ±0,5 dB 3 dBm ±0,5 dB CENTER 100MHz Port 1: measurement: -10 dBm ±0,5 dB -10dBm±0,5dB Port 2: -10 dBm ±0,5 dB 3 dBm ±0,5 dB OUTPUT a1: Read the level on power meter.
Page 744: Matching To Output A1
Test Sequence (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Measurement: Set test frequencies and levels according to test report, read the level on the power meter. Permissible deviations referred to the value at -10 dBm (+3 dBm at PORT 1 with Opt.
Page 745: Testing The Receiver Specifications
Test Sequence (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Alternative Measurement for R&S ZVR (firmware version 1.50 and higher) Test equipment: Test cable ZV-Z11, Calibration kit ZV-Z21, for 75 test set: Calibration kit ZCAN-75 and matching pad RAM Test setup: Connect test cable between PORT2 and Output a1 (for 75 : screw 75...
Page 746: Linearity
Test Sequence (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Measurement: Set test frequencies according to test report. Read out marker value on the ZVx Permissible deviation from the applied nominal level (–10 dBm) at PORT1 or PORT2, respectively: Passive test set:...
Page 747: Noise Level
Test Sequence (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Measurement: Set test frequencies and levels according to test report, report measurement results and subtract the reference values. Deviation from reference value (-10 dBm): Permissible deviation: 20 kHz to 200 kHz +10 dB to +3 dB <1 dB...
Page 748: Matching Input B1 And Input B2
Test Sequence (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) 5.2.2.4 Matching Input b1 and Input b2 (Only with Option External Measurements R&S ZVR-B25) Test equipment, Power Splitter RVZ, Calibration Kit ZV-Z21, Test Port Cable pair ZV-Z11 test set 50 : Power Splitter RVZ, Calibration Kit ZV-Z22, Test Port Cable pair ZV-Z12, 2...
Page 749 Test Sequence (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Alternative Measurement (firmware version 1.50 and higher) Test equipment, Calibration kit ZV-Z21, pair of test cables ZV-Z11. test set 50 : Calibration kit ZV-Z21, pair of test cables ZV-Z11, matching pad RAM, calibration kit Test equipment, ZCAN-75.
Page 750: Testing The Test Set Specifications
Test equipment Calibration Kit ZV-Z22, Test Port Cable pair ZV-Z12 test set 75 : Test setup: Test cable between PORT1 and PORT2. Settings at the R&S ZVR or R&S ZVRE, respectively: PRESET MEAS S22 for matching PORT1 S11 for matching PORT2...
Page 751: Directivity
• R&S ZVRL Measurement As with R&S ZVR and R&S ZVRE PORT2: Measurement With further network analyzer ZVx as with R&S ZVR and R&S ZVRE. PORT1 Measurement: Set test frequencies according to test report. Record return loss values. Test frequency:...
Page 752: Testing The Attenuators
Test Sequence (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) 5.2.3.3 Testing the Attenuators Test equipment: Connecting cable ZV-Z11 (50 ) or ZV-Z12 (75 ) Test setup: Connect cable between PORT1 and PORT2. Settings at the network analyzer: PRESET SWEEP SINGLE POINT...
Page 753: Crosstalk
Test Sequence (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) 5.2.3.4 Crosstalk Test equipment: 2 N-short-circuits (SHORT male and SHORT female with THRU male from calibration kit ZV-Z21 or ZV-Z22) Test setup: Connect N-short-circuits to PORT1 and PORT2. Settings at the network analyzer:...
Page 754: Performance Test Report (Zvr, Zvre, Zvrl)
Performance Test Report (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Performance Test Report (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Table 5-1: Performance Test Report – Generator Specifications Measure Item No. Characteristic according Min. value Actual value Max. value Unit to section Frequency accuracy 5.2.1.1...
Page 755 Performance Test Report (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Measure Item No. Characteristic according Min. value Actual value Max. value Unit to section Harmonics suppression with Opt. R&S ZVR-B10 5.2.1.2 Source Level: Max. value Test set ___________ 40 kHz passive...
Page 756 Performance Test Report (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Measure Item No. Characteristic according Min. value Actual value Max. value Unit to section Spurious suppression 5.2.1.3 R&S ZVRL ZVx frequ.: Spurious: ___________ R&S ZVR 10 kHz 63.115 MHz ___________ R&S ZVRE 63.105 MHz...
Page 757 Performance Test Report (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Measure Item No. Characteristic according Min. value Actual value Max. value Unit to section Residual FM 5.2.1.5 ___________ 1 MHz ___________ 9.99 MHz ___________ 149.9 MHz ___________ 750 MHz ___________ 1000 MHz...
Page 758 Performance Test Report (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Measure Item No. Characteristic according Min. value Actual value Max. value Unit to section Level accuracy 5.2.1.6 Port 2 test set Level: –10 dBm passive –1 ___________ 9 kHz –1 ___________ 20 kHz –1...
Page 759 Performance Test Report (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Measure Item No. Characteristic according Min. value Actual value Max. value Unit to section Level accuracy 5.2.1.6 Port 2 test set Level: –10 dBm active –1 ___________ 300 kHz –1 ___________ 1 MHz –0.5...
Page 760 Performance Test Report (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Measure Item No. Characteristic according Min. value Actual value Max. value Unit to section Level linearity 5.2.1.7 R&S ZVR Ref. level: R&S ZVRE –10dBm R&S ZVRL +3 dBm with Opt. ZVR-B10...
Page 761 Performance Test Report (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Table 5-2 Performance Test Report: Receiver specifications Measurement Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual Max. value Unit section value Absolute accuracy PORT1 5.2.2.1 INPUT a1: –11 _________ –9 Test Set...
Page 762 Performance Test Report (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Measurement Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual Max. value Unit section value Absolute accuracy PORT1 5.2.2.1 INPUT a1: –11 _________ –9 Test Set 100 MHz active _________ INPUT b1: –12...
Page 763 Performance Test Report (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Measurement Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual Max. value Unit section value Absolute accuracy INPUT b1 5.2.2.1 INPUT a1: –11 _________ –9 Option 100 MHz External Measure- INPUT b1: –12...
Page 764 Performance Test Report (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Measurement Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual Max. value Unit section value Linearity PORT1 5.2.2.2 Phase Reference: -10 dBm f = 1.5MHz –6 _________ degrees 10 dB –1 _________...
Page 765 Performance Test Report (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Measurement Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual Max. value Unit section value Linearity PORT2 5.2.2.2 Magnitude Reference: -10 dBm f = 4000 MHz –1 _________ 10 dB –0.2 _________ 3 dB –0.05...
Page 766 Performance Test Report (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Measurement Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual Max. value Unit section value Noise level PORT1 5.2.2.3 – _________ –50 R&S 10 kHz – _________ –50 R&S 20 kHz –...
Page 767 Performance Test Report (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Measurement Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual Max. value Unit section value Noise level PORT2 5.2.2.3 – _________ –70 R&S 300 kHz – _________ –80 ZVR 75N 1 MHz –...
Page 768 Performance Test Report (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Table 5-3 Performance Test Report: Test Set Specifications Measurement Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual Max. value Unit section value Matching PORT1 5.2.3.1 R&S _________ – 40 kHz ZVR 50 _________ –...
Page 769 Performance Test Report (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Measurement Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual Max. value Unit section value Matching PORT1 5.2.3.1 _________ – R&S 300 kHz _________ – 1 MHz ZVR 50 _________ – 100 MHz R&S...
Page 770 Performance Test Report (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Measurement Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual Max. value Unit section value Matching PORT2 5.2.3.1 _________ – 40 kHz _________ – R&S 100 kHz _________ – 100 MHz ZVRL 75 _________ –...
Page 771 Performance Test Report (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Measurement Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual Max. value Unit section value Directivity PORT2 5.2.3.2 _________ – R&S 9 kHz _________ – 40 kHz ZVR 50 _________ – 1 MHz R&S...
Page 772 Performance Test Report (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Measurement Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual Max. value Unit section value Directivity PORT2 5.2.3.2 _________ – R&S 9 kHz _________ – 40 kHz ZVR 75 _________ – 1 MHz R&S...
Page 773 Performance Test Report (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Measurement Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual Max. value Unit section value Attenuators 5.2.3.3 Option ATT a1 R&S f = 2000 MHz ZVR–B21 –2 _________ 0 dB –0.1 _________ 10 dB –2...
Page 774 Performance Test Report (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Measurement Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual Max. value Unit section value Attenuators 5.2.3.3 Option ATT a2 R&S f = 4000 MHz ZVR–B22 –2 _________ 0 dB –0.1 _________ 10 dB –2...
Page 775 Performance Test Report (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Measurement Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual Max. value Unit section value Attenuators 5.2.3.3 Option ATT b2 R&S f = 1 MHz ZVR–B24 –2 _________ 0 dB –0.1 _________ 10 dB –2...
Page 776 Performance Test Report (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Table 5-4 Performance Test Report: Crosstalk Measurement Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual value Max. value Unit section Crosstalk PORT1 5.2.3.4 R&S ZVR – ___________ –90 test set 20 kHz –...
Page 777 Performance Test Report (R&S ZVR, R&S ZVRE, R&S ZVRL) Measurement Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual value Max. value Unit section Crosstalk PORT2 5.2.3.4 – ___________ –90 R&S ZVR 9 kHz – ___________ –120 test set 201 kHz passive –...
Page 778: Measuring Instruments And Accessories (Zvc, Zvce)
Measuring Instruments and Accessories (ZVC, ZVCE) Measuring Instruments and Accessories (ZVC, ZVCE) Item Type of Instrument Required Specifications Appropriate R&S Order No. Device Modulation analyzer 1 MHz to 5.2 GHz R&S FMB 0856.5005.52 5.2.1.1 Opt. R&S FMA-B8 0855.9007.55 5.2.1.4 Opt. R&S FMA-B10 0856.3502.52 5.2.1.5 Power meter...
Page 779: Test Sequence (Zvc, Zvce)
Test Sequence (R&S ZVC, R&S ZVCE) Test Sequence (R&S ZVC, R&S ZVCE) The rated specifications of the network analyzer are checked after a warm-up time of at least 30 minutes and after performing the reference oscillator adjustment, recording of detector characteristics and factory calibration.
Page 780: Spurious Suppression
Test Sequence (R&S ZVC, R&S ZVCE) Measurement Set test frequencies according to test report. Measure at twice and three times the test frequency and calculate the difference from the measured value at the test frequency, report the worse of the two values. Test frequency range Harmonics suppression at Pmax...
Page 781: Phase Noise
Test Sequence (R&S ZVC, R&S ZVCE) Measurement: Set test frequencies according to test report. Mixer range up to 750 MHz: LO=RF+fo (fo = test frequency) For fo < 50 MHz RF = 63.125 MHz fo = 50 MHz to < 150 MHz RF = 252.5 MHz fo = 150 MHz to 750 MHz RF = 1010 MHz...
Page 782: Residual Fm
Test Sequence (R&S ZVC, R&S ZVCE) 5.5.1.5 Residual FM est equipment: Modulation meter FMB Test setup: Connect modulation meter (operating mode DEMOD FM DET RMS 10 Hz to 3 kHz) to PORT1 of the spectrum analyzer. Settings at the network analyzer: SWEEP SINGLE POINT CENTER...
Page 783: Level Linearity
Test Sequence (R&S ZVC, R&S ZVCE) 5.5.1.7 Level Linearity Test equipment: Power meter NRVD with power sensor NRV-Z5 Test setup: Connect power sensor to PORT1 or PORT2 of the network analyzer. Settings at the network analyzer: SWEEP SINGLE POINT CENTER Test frequency SOURCE POWER Maximum value to minimum value...
Page 784: Matching To Output A1
Test Sequence (R&S ZVC, R&S ZVCE) 5.5.1.8 Matching to Output a1 (Only with Option R&S ZVR-B25, External Measurements) Test equipment: Signal generator SMP, Spectrum Analyzer FSEM, VSWR–bridge Test setup: Port 1 Port 2 FSEM bridge Settings at the network analyzer: SWEEP SINGLE POINT CENTER...
Page 785: Testing The Receiver Specifications
Test Sequence (R&S ZVC, R&S ZVCE) 5.5.2 Testing the Receiver Specifications 5.5.2.1 Absolute Accuracy Test equipment: Test cable ZV-Z11 Calibration: Perform POWER CAL a1, a2. Test setup: Connect PORT1 to PORT 2 or Output a1 to INPUT b1 or to INPUT b2 via test cable.
Page 786: Linearity
Test Sequence (R&S ZVC, R&S ZVCE) 5.5.2.2 Linearity Test equipment: Attenuator RSM Test setup: Connect RSM between PORT1 and PORT2. Settings at the network analyzer: PRESET POWER UNCAL off MODE SWEEP MODE : POWER SWEEP SWEEP NUMBER OF POINTS = 51 SOURCE Test frequency START...
Page 787: Noise Level
Test Sequence (R&S ZVC, R&S ZVCE) 60 dB to 70 dB (ZVCE) <1 dB <6° 60 dB to 75 dB (ZVC) <1 dB <6° 4 GHz to 8 GHz +10 dB to +3 dB <1 dB <6° + 3 dB to 45 dB <0.2 dB <2°...
Page 788: Matching Input B1 And Input B2
Test Sequence (R&S ZVC, R&S ZVCE) Measurement: Set test frequencies according to test report. Read marker value on the network analyzer taking the SOURCE POWER (-10 dB) into account. Permissible noise values: Model 50, 60 Model 51, 52, 61, 62 20 kHz to 200 kHz -70 dBm -64 dBm...
Page 789 Test Sequence (R&S ZVC, R&S ZVCE) Reference One-port calibration including THRU over the complete frequency range (for measurement: measurement at b1 and b2 an extra calibration each). Measurement: Set marker frequencies according to test report, measure b1 and b2. Record return loss values. Return loss: >...
Page 790: Testing The Test Set Specifications
Test Sequence (R&S ZVC, R&S ZVCE) 5.5.3 Testing the Test Set Specifications 5.5.3.1 Matching to PORT1 and PORT2 Test equipment Calibration Kit ZV-Z21, Test Port Cable pair ZV-Z11 Test setup: Test cable between PORT1 and PORT2. Settings at the ZVC or ZVCE, respectively: PRESET SWEEP LOG SWEEP...
Page 791: Testing The Attenuators
Test Sequence (R&S ZVC, R&S ZVCE) Reference Perform reflection normalization (CAL menu) at PORT1 or PORT2, respectively. measurement: Measurement: Set marker to test frequencies according to test report. Record directivity values. Test frequency: Directivity: Mod. 50, 60 Mod. 52, 62 Mod.
Page 792: Crosstalk
Test Sequence (R&S ZVC, R&S ZVCE) Permissible deviations: ATT a1, a2 ATT b1, b2 < 2 dB < 2 dB 5.5.3.4 Crosstalk Test equipment: 2 N-short-circuits Test setup: Connect N-short-circuits to PORT1 and PORT2. Settings at the network analyzer: PRESET SWEEP LOG SWEEP SOURCE POWER...
Page 793: Performance Test Report (Zvc, Zvce)
Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Table 5-5: Performance Test Report – Generator Specifications Measuremt. Item No. Characteristics according Min. value Actual Max. value Unit to section value Frequency accuracy 5.2.1.1 -0.98 ___________ 0.98 500 MHz -1.58 ___________ 1.58...
Page 794 Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Measuremt. Item No. Characteristics according Min. value Actual Max. value Unit to section value 1001 MHz __________ 1501 MHz __________ 2001 MHz __________ 2500 MHz __________ 3000 MHz __________ 3500 MHz __________ 4000 MHz __________ 4010 MHz __________ 5000 MHz...
Page 795 Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Measuremt. Item No. Characteristics according Min. value Actual Max. value Unit to section value 1001 MHz __________ 1501 MHz __________ 2000 MHz __________ 2500 MHz __________ 3000 MHz __________ 3500 MHz __________ 4000 MHz __________ 4010 MHz __________ 5000 MHz...
Page 796 Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Measuremt. Item No. Characteristics according Min. value Actual Max. value Unit to section value 3000 MHz 1500 MHz __________ 4500 MHz __________ 3200 MHz 1600 MHz __________ 4800 MHz __________ 3310 MHz 1655 MHz __________ 4965 MHz __________ 3400 MHz...
Page 797 Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Measuremt. Item No. Characteristics according Min. value Actual Max. value Unit to section value Residual FM 5.2.1.5 __________ 1 MHz __________ 9.99 MHz __________ 149.9 MHz __________ 750 MHz __________ 1000 MHz __________ 2000 MHz __________ 3000 MHz __________...
Page 798 Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Measuremt. Item No. Characteristics according Min. value Actual Max. value Unit to section value Level accuracy PORT1 5.2.1.6 Level: –10 dBm 0 dBm w. opt. ZVR-B10 –1 __________ 20 kHz –1 __________ 40 kHz –1 __________ 100 kHz –1...
Page 799 Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Measuremt. Item No. Characteristics according Min. value Actual Max. value Unit to section value Level linearity 5.2.1.7 Reference: –10 dBm f = 40 kHz __________ 10.4 10dB __________ –5.4 __________ –4.6 –5dB –10.8 __________ –9.2 –10dB –15.8 __________...
Page 800 Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Measuremt. Item No. Characteristics according Min. value Actual Max. value Unit to section value Level linearity 5.2.1.7 Model 50 and 60 w. opt. ZVR-B10 Reference: 0 dBm f = 20 kHz __________ 10.4 10dB __________ –5.4 __________ –4.6...
Page 801 Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Measuremt. Item No. Characteristics according Min. value Actual Max. value Unit to section value Level linearity 5.2.1.7 Model 51 and 61 w. opt. ZVR-B10 Reference: 0 dBm f = 20 kHz __________ 6 dB –4.4 __________ –3.6 –4 dB...
Page 802 Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Measuremt. Item No. Characteristics according Min. value Actual Max. value Unit to section value Level linearity 5.2.1.7 Model 52 and 62 w. opt. ZVR-B10 Reference: 0 dBm f = 300 kHz __________ 6 dB –4.4 __________ –3.6 –4 dB...
Page 803 Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Measuremt. Item No. Characteristics according Min. value Actual Max. value Unit to section value Matching Output a1 5.2.1.8 Only Option __________ –8 External 400 kHz __________ –8 Measurements 2 MHz __________ –8 100 MHz __________ –8 300 MHz __________...
Page 804 Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Table 5-6 Performance Test Report: Receiver Specifications Measuremt. Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual Max. value Unit section value Absolute Accuracy PORT1 5.2.2.1 Level: –10 dBm –8 _________ Model 20 kHz –8 _________ 40 kHz –8 _________...
Page 805 Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Measuremt. Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual Max. value Unit section value Absolute Accuracy Input b1 Level: –10 dBm 5.2.2.1 Option Ext. –8 _________ Measureme 20 kHz –8 _________ 40 kHz –8 _________ 100 kHz –8 _________...
Page 806 Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Measuremt. Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual Max. value Unit section value Linearity model 50 and 60 5.2.2.2 Magnitude Reference: -20 dBm f = 1.5 MHz –1 _________ 10 dB –0.2 _________ 3 dB –0.2 _________ –5 dB...
Page 807 Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Measuremt. Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual Max. value Unit section value Linearity model 51, 52, 61, 62 5.2.2.2 Magnitude Reference: -10 dBm f = 1.5 MHz –0.2 _________ 3 dB –0.2 _________ –5 dB –0.2 _________...
Page 808 Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Measuremt. Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual Max. value Unit section value Noise level b1 5.2.2.3 Model 50 and 60 – _________ –70 21 kHz – _________ –70 150 kHz – _________ –90 200 kHz –...
Page 809 Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Measuremt. Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual Max. value Unit section value Noise level b2 5.2.2.3 Model 51, 52, 61, 62 – _________ –64 21 kHz Model – _________ –64 150 kHz 51 and 61 –...
Page 810 Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Table 5-7 Performance Test Report: Test Set Specifications Measuremt. Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual Max. value Unit section value Matching PORT1 5.2.3.1 Model 50 and 60 – _________ –6 20 kHz – _________ –6 40 kHz...
Page 811 Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Measuremt. Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual Max. value Unit section value Matching PORT1 5.2.3.1 Model 51 and 61 – _________ –10 40 kHz – _________ –10 100 kHz – _________ –16 10 MHz –...
Page 812 Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Measuremt. Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual Max. value Unit section value Matching PORT1 5.2.3.1 Model 52 and 62 – _________ –6 300 kHz – _________ –16 5 MHz – _________ –18 100 MHz –...
Page 813 Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Measuremt. Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual Max. value Unit section value Directivity PORT1 5.2.3.2 Model 50 and 60 – _________ –16 1500 MHz – _________ –16 2000 MHz – _________ –16 2500 MHz –...
Page 814 Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Measuremt. Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual Max. value Unit section value Directivity PORT2 5.2.3.2 Model 51, 52, 61, 62 Model – _________ –30 40 kHz 51 and 61 – _________ –30 5 MHz Model –...
Page 815 Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Measuremt. Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual Max. value Unit section value Attenuators 5.2.3.3 Option ATT a1 R&S ZVR–B21 f = 4000 MHz –2 _________ 0 dB –0.1 _________ 10 dB –2 _________ 20 dB –2 _________...
Page 816 Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Measuremt. Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual Max. value Unit section value Attenuators 5.2.3.3 Option ATT a2 R&S ZVR–B22 f = 4000 MHz –2 _________ 0 dB –0.1 _________ 10 dB –2 _________ 20 dB –2 _________...
Page 817 Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Measuremt. Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual Max. value Unit section value Attenuators 5.2.3.3 Option ATT b1 R&S ZVR–B23 f = 4000 MHz –2 _________ 0 dB –0.1 _________ 10 dB –2 _________ 20 dB –2 _________...
Page 818 Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Measuremt. Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual Max. value Unit section value Attenuators 5.2.3.3 Option ATT b2 R&S ZVR–B24 f = 4000 MHz –2 _________ 0 dB –0.1 _________ 10 dB –2 _________ 20 dB –2 _________...
Page 819 Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Table 5-8 Performance Test Report: Crosstalk Measuremt. Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual value Max. value Unit section Crosstalk PORT1 5.2.4 Model 50 – ___________ –90 20 kHz – ___________ –120 201 kHz –...
Page 820 Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Measuremt. Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual value Max. value Unit section Crosstalk PORT1 5.2.4 Model 60 – ___________ –90 20 kHz – ___________ –120 201 kHz – ___________ –120 2.5 MHz – ___________ –130 5.1 MHz...
Page 821 Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Measuremt. Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual value Max. value Unit section Crosstalk PORT1 5.2.4 Model 51 and 52 – ___________ –84 20 kHz Model 51 – ___________ –114 300 kHz Model 51 –...
Page 822 Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Measuremt. Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual value Max. value Unit section Crosstalk PORT1 5.2.4 Model 61 and 62 – ___________ –84 20 kHz Model 61 – ___________ –114 300 kHz Model61 and 62 –...
Page 823 Performance Test Report (ZVC, ZVCE) Measuremt. Item No. Characteristics according to Min. value Actual value Max. value Unit section Crosstalk PORT1 5.2.4 w. option ZVR-B10 Model 50, 51, – ___________ –75 20 kHz 60, 61 – ___________ –105 300 kHz All Models –...
Page 824: Checking Of Rated Specifications
Measuring Equipment and Accessories (ZVM, ZVK) Checking of Rated Specifications Measuring Equipment and Accessories (ZVM, ZVK) Item Instrument type Required specifications Suitable instru- R&S Order Application ment Spectrum analyzer 10 MHz to 20 GHz (ZVM) FSEK30 1088.3494.35 5.2.1.1 10 MHz to 40 GHz (ZVK), with FSE-B22 1106.3480.02 5.2.1.2...
Page 825: Test Procedure (Zvm & Zvk)
Test Procedure (ZVM & ZVK) Test Procedure (ZVM & ZVK) The rated specifications of the network analyzer are checked after a warm-up time of at least one hour. Only this warmup ensures that the specifications are complied with. The values stated in the following are not guaranteed. Only the data sheet specifications shall be bind- ing.
Page 826: Harmonics
Test Procedure (ZVM & ZVK) 5.2.1.2 Harmonics Test equipment: FSEK30, test cable ½ Connect FSEK30 (delta-marker mode) to PORT1 (PORT2) of the network ana- Test setup: lyzer. Settings on network analyzer: PRESET CENTER Measurement frequency SWEEP SINGLE POINT SWEEP TIME 255 s SOURCE POWER ZVM:-10 dBm or maximum level (5 dBm / 2 dBm)
Page 827: Spurious
Test Procedure (ZVM & ZVK) 5.2.1.3 Spurious Test equipment: FSEK30, test cable ½ Connect FSEK30 (delta-marker mode) to PORT1 of the network analyzer. Test setup: Settings on network analyzer: PRESET CENTER Measurement frequency SWEEP SINGLE POINT SWEEP TIME 255 s SOURCE POWER -20 dBm (minimum level) MEAS...
Page 828: Phase Noise
Test Procedure (ZVM & ZVK) 5.2.1.4 Phase Noise Test equipment: Modulation meter FMB with option FMA-B8, FSEK30, BNC connecting cable ½ Connect modulation meter (mode DEMOD PM PHASENOISE 10 kHz) to PORT1 Test setup: of the network analyzer. Settings on network analyzer: PRESET SWEEP SINGLE POINT...
Page 829: Residual Fm
Test Procedure (ZVM & ZVK) 5.2.1.5 Residual FM Test equipment: Modulation meter FMB with option FMA-B8, FSEK30, BNC connecting cable ½ Connect modulation meter (mode DEMOD FM DET RMS 10 Hz to 3 kHz) to Test setup: PORT1 of the network analyzer Settings on network analyzer: PRESET SWEEP...
Page 830: Level Accuracy
Test Procedure (ZVM & ZVK) 5.2.1.6 Level Accuracy Test equipment: Power Meter NRVD with sensor NRV-Z52 (ZVM), NRV-Z55 (ZVK), Female-female adapter from calibration kit ZV-Z32 (ZVM) or ZV-Z34 (ZVK) ½ Connect power sensor to PORT1, PORT2 of the network analyzer. Test setup: Settings on network analyzer: PRESET...
Page 831: Level Linearity
Test Procedure (ZVM & ZVK) 5.2.1.7 Level Linearity Test equipment: FSEK30, test cable, BNC cable for reference frequency ½ Connect FSEK30 to PORT1 (PORT2) of the network analyzer. Synchronize Test setup 50Ω: FSEK30 with network analyzer. ½ Important: IF BW on FSEK30 < 1 kHz (digital bandwidths) Settings on network analyzer: PRESET SWEEP...
Page 832: Checking The Receiver Specifications
Test Procedure (ZVM & ZVK) 5.2.2 Checking the Receiver Specifications 5.2.2.1 Absolute Accuracy Test equipment: Signal Generator SMR40 with option SMR-B11 Power Splitter PC 3.5 (ZVM) or Power Splitter PC 2.92 (ZVK) NRVD with sensor NRV-Z52 (ZVM), NRV-Z55 (ZVK) Connecting cable SMR40 => power splitter BNC cable to frequency synchronization.
Page 833: Linearity
Test Procedure (ZVM & ZVK) 5.2.2.2 Linearity Test equipment: 20 dB attenuator PC 3.5, SMA (ZVM) or PC 2.92 (ZVM, ZVK), Test Cable ZV-Z14 (ZVM) or ZV-Z15 (ZVK), Female-female adapter from ZV-Z32 (ZVM) or ZV-Z34 (ZVK) Test setup: Connect test cable with 20 dB attenuator between PORT1 and PORT2. Settings on network analyzer: PRESET POWER UNCAL off...
Page 834: Noise Level
Test Procedure (ZVM & ZVK) 5.2.2.3 Noise Level Test equipment: MATCH female from Calibration Kit ZV-Z32 (ZVM) or ZV-Z34 (ZVK) ½ PRESET Calibration: ½ SOURCE Level –20 dBm ½ Terminate Port 1 and Port 2 with match from ZV-Z32 or ZV-Z34. ½...
Page 835: Match Input B1 And Input B2
Test Procedure (ZVM & ZVK) 5.2.2.4 Match Input b1 and Input b2 (only with option ZVM-B23 / ZVK-B23 or ZVM-B24 / ZVK-B24) Test equipment: Calibration Kit ZV-Z32, pair of Test Cables ZV-Z14 (ZVM); Calibration Kit ZV-Z34, pair of Test Cables ZV-Z15 (ZVK) Test setup: Description for INPUT B2 (for INPUT B1 analogously) Connect test cable to PORT1,...
Page 836: Checking The Test Set Specifications
Test Procedure (ZVM & ZVK) 5.2.3 Checking the Test Set Specifications 5.2.3.1 Match at PORT1 and PORT2 Test equipment: Calibration Kit ZV-Z32, pair of Test Cables ZV-Z14 (ZVM); Calibration Kit ZV-Z34, pair of Test Cables ZV-Z15 (ZVK) Test setup: Description for PORT2 (for PORT1 analogously) Connect test cable to PORT1, connect female-female adapter to male end.
Page 837: Matching Reference Channel Inputs R1 And R2 Channel In
Test Procedure (ZVM & ZVK) 5.2.3.2 Matching Reference Channel Inputs R1 and R2 Channel IN Test equipment: Calibration Kit ZV-Z32, pair of Test Cables ZV-Z14 (ZVM); Calibration Kit ZV-Z34, pair of Test Cables ZV-Z15 (ZVK) Test setup: Description for R2 Channel IN (for R1 Channel IN analogously) Connect test cable to PORT1.
Page 838: Raw Directivity
Test Procedure (ZVM & ZVK) 5.2.3.3 Raw Directivity Test equipment: OPEN, SHORT, MATCH female from Calibration Kit ZV-Z32 (ZVM), ZV-Z34 (ZVK) A broadband termination, e.g. from ZV-Z34, must be used for ZVK. Reference PRESET measurement: Connect OPEN female to Port1 (or Port2). MEAS: RATIO: WAVE QUANTITY: b1/a1 (Port1), b2/a2 (Port2) Normalizing: TRACE, DATA TO MEM, SHOW MATH (/) Connect MATCH to Port1 (or Port2).
Page 839: Checking The Attenuators
Test Procedure (ZVM & ZVK) 5.2.3.4 Checking the Attenuators Test equipment: Test Cable ZV-Z14, female-female adapter PC 3.5 from ZV-Z32; Test Cable ZV-Z15, female-female adapter PC 2.92 from ZV-Z34 Test setup: Connect cable between PORT1 and PORT2. Settings on network analyzer: PRESET SWEEP SINGLE POINT...
Page 840: Dynamic Range
5.2.3.5 Dynamic Range Test equipment: ZVM: 2 PC 3.5 SHORT (e.g. SHORT male and SHORT female with THRU male from Calibration Kit ZV-Z32); ZVK: 2 PC 2.92 SHORT (e.g. SHORT male and SHORT female with THRU male from Calibration Kit ZV-Z34) Test setup: Connect short-circuits to PORT1 and PORT2.
Page 841: Performance Test Record (Zvm)
Performance Test Record (ZVM) Performance Test Record (ZVM) The indicated uncertainties refer to the proposed test setup / test procedure. The expanded measurement uncertainty amounts to k = 2 (confidence level of 95%, Gauss distribution). Additional measurement uncertainties, which are within the user’s responsibility, have not been taken into account (e.g.
Page 842 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dBc tainty / dB to section value/dBc Harmonics 5.2.1.2 PORT1 Measurement at source level 5 dBm (2 dBm with ZVM-B21) ZVM frq. Harmonic: 10 MHz 20 MHz ___________ 30 MHz ___________...
Page 843 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dBc tainty / dB to section value/dBc Harmonics 5.2.1.2 PORT2 Measurement at source level 5 dBm (2 dBm with ZVM-B22) ZVM frq. Harmonic: 10 MHz 20 MHz ___________ 30 MHz ___________...
Page 844 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dBc tainty / dB to section value/dBc Harmonics 5.2.1.2 PORT 1 Measurement at source level –10 dBm ZVM frq. Harmonic: 10 MHz 20 MHz ___________ 30 MHz ___________ 100 MHz 200 MHz...
Page 845 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dBc tainty / dB to section value/dBc Harmonics 5.2.1.2 PORT 2 Measurement at source level –10 dBm ZVM frq. Harmonic: 10 MHz 20 MHz ___________ 30 MHz ___________ 100 MHz 200 MHz...
Page 846 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dBc tainty / dB to section value/dBc Spurious 5.2.1.3 Measurement at source level –20 dBm ZVM frq. Spurious: 10 MHz 53.125 MHz ___________ 43.125 MHz ___________ 50 MHz 202.5 MHz ___________ 152.5 MHz...
Page 847 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dBc tainty / dB to section value/dBc 5.2.1.3 3.4 GHz 1.7 GHz ___________ 5.1 GHz ___________ 3.6 GHz 1.8 GHz ___________ 5.4 GHz ___________ 3.8 GHz 1.9 GHz ___________ 5.7 GHz ___________...
Page 848 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dBc tainty / dB to section value/dBc 5.2.1.3 8 GHz 1.00 GHz ___________ 2.00 GHz ___________ 3.00 GHz ___________ 4.00 GHz ___________ 5.00 GHz ___________ 6.00 GHz ___________ 7.00 GHz ___________...
Page 849 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dBc tainty / dB to section value/dBc 5.2.1.3 13.8 GHz 1.7250 GHz ___________ 3.4500 GHz ___________ 5.1750 GHz ___________ 6.9000 GHz ___________ 8.6250 GHz ___________ 10.350 GHz ___________ 12.075 GHz ___________...
Page 850 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dBc tainty / dB to section value/dBc 5.2.1.3 20 GHz 1.250 GHz ___________ 2.500 GHz ___________ 3.750 GHz ___________ 5.000 GHz ___________ 6.250 GHz ___________ 7.500 GHz ___________ 8.750 GHz ___________...
Page 851 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. value/Hz max. tainty / Hz to section value/Hz Residual FM 5.2.1.5 ___________ 0.71 0.010 GHz ___________ 0.73 0.100 GHz ___________ 0.83 0.500 GHz ___________ 0.97 1.000 GHz ___________ 10.0 1.500 GHz ___________...
Page 852 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dBm max. tainty / dB to section value/dBm value/dBm Level accuracy PORT1 5.2.1.6 0.010 GHz –12.0 ___________ –8.0 0.22 0.100 GHz –12.0 ___________ –8.0 0.17 0.150 GHz –11.0 ___________ –9.0...
Page 853 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Level linearity PORT1 5.2.1.7 Reference: –10 dBm without option ZVM-B21 f = 0.0101 GHz 15 dB 14.0 ___________ 16.0 0.051...
Page 854 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Level linearity PORT1 5.2.1.7 Reference: –10 dBm without option ZVM-B21 f = 10.000 GHz 15 dB 14.6 ___________ 15.4 0.051...
Page 855 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Level linearity PORT2 5.2.1.7 Reference: –10 dBm without opt. ZVM-B22: f = 0.0101 GHz 15 dB 14.0 ___________ 16.0 0.051...
Page 856 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Level linearity PORT2 5.2.1.7 Reference: –10 dBm without opt. ZVM-B22: f = 10.000 GHz 15 dB 14.6 ___________ 15.4 0.051...
Page 857 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Level linearity PORT1 5.2.1.7 Reference: –10 dBm with option ZVM-B21 f = 0.0101 GHz 12 dB 12.0 ___________ 13.0 0.051...
Page 858 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Level linearity PORT1 5.2.1.7 Reference: –10 dBm with option ZVM-B21 f = 10.000 GHz 12 dB 11.6 ___________ 12.4 0.051...
Page 859 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Level linearity PORT2 5.2.1.7 Reference: –10 dBm with option ZVM-B22 f = 0.0101 GHz 12 dB 12.0 ___________ 13.0 0.051...
Page 860 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Level linearity PORT2 5.2.1.7 Reference: –10 dBm with option ZVM-B22 f = 10.000 GHz 12 dB 11.6 ___________ 12.4 0.051...
Page 861 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Absolute accuracy PORT1 5.2.2.1 Input level –10 dBm Difference from –10 dBm: –2.0 ____________ 0.50 0.010 GHz –2.0 ____________ 0.43...
Page 862 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Absolute accuracy PORT2 5.2.2.1 Input level –10 dBm Difference from –10 dBm: –2.0 ____________ 0.50 0.010 GHz –2.0 ____________ 0.43...
Page 863 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Absolute accuracy INPUT B1 5.2.2.1 Input level –10 dBm Difference from –10 dBm: –2.0 ____________ 0.50 0.010 GHz –2.0 ____________ 0.50...
Page 864 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Absolute accuracy INPUT B2 5.2.2.1 Input level –10 dBm Difference from –10 dBm: –2.0 ____________ 0.50 0.010 GHz –2.0 ____________ 0.50...
Page 865 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Linearity B1 5.2.2.2 Reference: –10 dBm f = 0.0101 GHz 15 dB -0.2 ___________ 0.058 10 dB -0.2 ___________ 0.058...
Page 866 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Linearity B1 5.2.2.2 Reference: –10 dBm f = 10.20 GHz 15 dB -0.2 ___________ 0.058 10 dB -0.2 ___________ 0.058...
Page 867 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/° value/° max. value/° tainty / ° to section Linearity B1 5.2.2.2 Reference: –10 dBm f = 0.0101 GHz 15 dB ___________ 0.58 10 dB ___________ 0.58 5 dB ___________...
Page 868 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/° value/° max. value/° tainty / ° to section Linearity B1 5.2.2.2 Reference: –10 dBm f = 10.20 GHz 15 dB ___________ 0.58 10 dB ___________ 0.58 5 dB ___________...
Page 869 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. va- tainty / dB to section lue/dB Linearity B2 5.2.2.2 Reference: –10 dBm f = 0.0101 GHz 15 dB -0.2 ___________ 0.058 10 dB -0.2 ___________ 0.058...
Page 870 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. va- tainty / dB to section lue/dB Linearity B2 5.2.2.2 Reference: –10 dBm f = 10.20 GHz 15 dB -0.2 ___________ 0.058 10 dB -0.2 ___________ 0.058...
Page 871 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/° value/° max. value/° tainty / ° to section Linearity B2 5.2.2.2 Reference: –10 dBm f = 0.0101 GHz 15 dB ___________ 0.58 10 dB ___________ 0.58 5 dB ___________...
Page 872 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/° value/° max. value/° tainty / ° to section Linearity B2 5.2.2.2 Reference: –10 dBm f = 10.20 GHz 15 dB ___________ 0.58 10 dB ___________ 0.58 5 dB ___________...
Page 873 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Noise level PORT1 5.2.2.3 IF BW 10 Hz: 0.010 GHz ____________ -70.0 0.100 GHz ____________ -70.0 0.150 GHz ____________ -70.0 0.500 GHz...
Page 874 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Noise level PORT2 5.2.2.3 IF BW 10 Hz: 0.010 GHz ____________ -70.0 0.100 GHz ____________ -70.0 0.150 GHz ____________ -70.0 0.500 GHz...
Page 875 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Match INPUT B1 5.2.2.4 With ZVM-B23 installed: 0.050 GHz 10.0 ____________ 0.100 GHz 10.0 ____________ 0.150 GHz 10.0 ____________ 0.500 GHz...
Page 876 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Match INPUT B2 5.2.2.4 With ZVM-B24 installed: 0.050 GHz 10.0 ____________ 0.100 GHz 10.0 ____________ 0.150 GHz 10.0 ____________ 0.500 GHz...
Page 877 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Match PORT 1 5.2.3.1 0.010 GHz 10.0 ____________ 0.050 GHz 12.0 ____________ 0.100 GHz 12.0 ____________ 0.500 GHz 12.0 ____________ 1.000 GHz...
Page 878 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Match PORT 2 5.2.3.1 0.010 GHz 10.0 ____________ 0.050 GHz 12.0 ____________ 0.100 GHz 12.0 ____________ 0.500 GHz 12.0 ____________ 1.000 GHz...
Page 879 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Match 5.2.3.2 R1 CHANNEL IN 0.010 GHz 12.0 ____________ 0.100 GHz 12.0 ____________ 0.150 GHz 12.0 ____________ 0.500 GHz 12.0 ____________...
Page 880 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Match 5.2.3.2 R2 CHANNEL IN 0.010 GHz 12.0 ____________ 0.100 GHz 12.0 ____________ 0.150 GHz 12.0 ____________ 0.500 GHz 12.0 ____________...
Page 881 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Raw directivity PORT1 5.2.3.3 0.010 GHz ____________ 0.100 GHz ____________ 0.150 GHz ____________ 0.500 GHz ____________ 1.000 GHz ____________ 1.500 GHz ____________...
Page 882 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Raw directivity PORT2 5.2.3.3 0.010 GHz ____________ 0.100 GHz ____________ 0.150 GHz ____________ 0.500 GHz ____________ 1.000 GHz ____________ 1.500 GHz ____________...
Page 883 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Generator step attenu- 5.2.3.4 ator A1 With ZVM-B21 installed: f = 1.0 GHz, reference value 10 dB 0 dB -3.0 ____________...
Page 884 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Generator step attenu- 5.2.3.4 ator A2 With ZVM-B22 stalled: f = 1.0 GHz, reference value 10 dB 0 dB -3.0 ____________...
Page 885 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Receiver step attenu- 5.2.3.4 ator B1 With ZVM-B23 installed f = 1.0 GHz, reference value 10 dB 0 dB -3.0 ____________...
Page 886 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Receiver step attenu- 5.2.3.4 ator B2 With ZVM-B24 installed f = 1.0 GHz, reference value 10 dB 0 dB -3.0 ____________...
Page 887 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Dynamic range PORT 1 5.2.3.5 IF BW 10 Hz: 0.010 GHz 75.0 ____________ 0.100 GHz 75.0 ____________ 0.500 GHz 115.0 ____________...
Page 888 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Dynamic range PORT 1 5.2.3.5 With option ZVM-Z2x installed. IF BW 10 Hz: 0.010 GHz 75.0 ____________ 0.100 GHz 75.0 ____________...
Page 889 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Dynamic range PORT 1 5.2.3.5 IF BW 10 kHz: 0.010 GHz 45.0 ____________ 0.100 GHz 45.0 ____________ 0.500 GHz 85.0 ____________...
Page 890 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Dynamic range PORT 2 5.2.3.5 IF BW 10 Hz: 0.010 GHz 75.0 ____________ 0.100 GHz 75.0 ____________ 0.500 GHz 115.0 ____________...
Page 891 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Dynamic range PORT 2 5.2.3.5 With option ZVM-Z2x installed. IF BW 10 Hz: 0.010 GHz 75.0 ____________ 0.100 GHz 75.0 ____________...
Page 892 Performance Test Record (ZVM) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Dynamic range PORT 2 5.2.3.5 IF BW 10 kHz: 0.010 GHz 45.0 ____________ 0.100 GHz 45.0 ____________ 0.500 GHz 85.0 ____________...
Page 893: Performance Test Record (Zvk)
Performance Test Record (ZVK) Performance Test Record (ZVK) The indicated uncertainties refer to the proposed test setup / test procedure. The expanded measurement uncertainty amounts to k = 2 (confidence level of 95%, Gauss distribution). Additional measurement uncertainties, which are within the user’s responsibility, have not been taken into account (e.g.
Page 894 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dBc tainty / dB to section value/dBc Harmonics PORT1 5.2.1.2 Measurement at source level 0 dBm (-3 dBm with ZVK-B21) ZVK frq. Harmonic: 10 MHz 20 MHz 30 MHz ___________ ___________...
Page 895 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dBc tainty / dB to section value/dBc Harmonics PORT1 5.2.1.2 Measurement at source level 0 dBm (-3 dBm with ZVK-B21) ZVK frq. Harmonic: 10.2 GHz 20.4 GHz 30.6 GHz ___________ ___________...
Page 896 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dBc tainty / dB to section value/dBc Harmonics PORT2 5.2.1.2 Measurement at source level 0 dBm (-3 dBm with ZVK-B21) ZVK frq. Harmonic: 10 MHz 20 MHz 30 MHz ___________ ___________...
Page 897 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dBc tainty / dB to section value/dBc Harmonics PORT2 5.2.1.2 Measurement at source level 0 dBm (-3 dBm with ZVK-B21) ZVK frq. Harmonic: 10.2 GHz 20.4 GHz 30.6 GHz ___________ ___________...
Page 898 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dBc tainty / dB to section value/dBc Harmonics PORT1 5.2.1.2 Measurement at source level –10 dBm ZVK frq. Harmonic: 10 MHz 20 MHz 30 MHz ___________ ___________ 100 MHz 200 MHz 300 MHz...
Page 899 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dBc tainty / dB to section value/dBc Harmonics PORT1 5.2.1.2 Measurement at source level –10 dBm ZVK frq. Harmonic: 10.2 GHz 20.4 GHz 30.6 GHz ___________ ___________ 12 GHz 24 GHz 36 GHz...
Page 900 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dBc tainty / dB to section value/dBc Harmonics PORT2 5.2.1.2 Measurement at source level –10 dBm ZVK frq. Harmonic: 10 MHz 20 MHz 30 MHz ___________ ___________ 100 MHz 200 MHz 300 MHz...
Page 901 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dBc tainty / dB to section value/dBc Harmonics PORT2 5.2.1.2 Measurement at source level –10 dBm ZVK frq. Harmonic: 10.2 GHz 20.4 GHz 30.6 GHz ___________ ___________ 12 GHz 24 GHz 36 GHz...
Page 902 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dBc tainty / dB to section value/dBc Spurious 5.2.1.3 Measurement at source level –20 dBm ZVK frq. Spurious: 10 MHz 53.125 MHz ___________ 43.125 MHz ___________ 50 MHz 202.5 MHz ___________ 152.5 MHz...
Page 903 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dBc tainty / dB to section value/dBc 5.2.1.3 3.4 GHz 1.7 GHz ___________ 5.1 GHz ___________ 3.6 GHz 1.8 GHz ___________ 5.4 GHz ___________ 3.8 GHz 1.9 GHz ___________ 5.7 GHz ___________...
Page 904 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dBc tainty / dB to section value/dBc 5.2.1.3 8 GHz 1.00 GHz ___________ 2.00 GHz ___________ 3.00 GHz ___________ 4.00 GHz ___________ 5.00 GHz ___________ 6.00 GHz ___________ 7.00 GHz ___________...
Page 905 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dBc tainty / dB to section value/dBc 5.2.1.3 13.8 GHz 1.7250 GHz ___________ 3.4500 GHz ___________ 5.1750 GHz ___________ 6.9000 GHz ___________ 8.6250 GHz ___________ 10.350 GHz ___________ 12.075 GHz ___________...
Page 906 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dBc tainty / dB to section value/dBc 5.2.1.3 20 GHz 1.25 GHz ___________ 2.50 GHz ___________ 3.75 GHz ___________ 5.00 GHz ___________ 6.25 GHz ___________ 7.50 GHz ___________ 8.75 GHz ___________...
Page 907 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dBc tainty / dB to section value/dBc 5.2.1.3 36 GHz 1.125 GHz ___________ 2.250 GHz ___________ 3.375 GHz ___________ 4.500 GHz ___________ 5.625 GHz ___________ 6.750 GHz ___________ 7.875 GHz ___________...
Page 908 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dBc tainty / dB to section value/dBc 5.2.1.3 40 GHz 1.25 GHz ___________ 2.50 GHz ___________ 3.75 GHz ___________ 5.00 GHz ___________ 6.25 GHz ___________ 7.50 GHz ___________ 8.75 GHz ___________...
Page 909 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dBc tainty / dB to section value/dBc SSB phase noise 5.2.1.4 100.0 ___________ 0.010 GHz 100.0 ___________ 0.100 GHz 90.00 ___________ 0.500 GHz 90.00 ___________ 1.000 GHz 86.50 ___________ 1.500 GHz...
Page 910 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. value/Hz max. value tainty / Hz to section Residual FM 5.2.1.5 ___________ 0.010 GHz ___________ 0.100 GHz ___________ 0.500 GHz ___________ 1.000 GHz ___________ 10.0 1.500 GHz ___________ 10.0 1.998 GHz ___________...
Page 911 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dBm max. tainty / dB to section value/dBm value/dBm Level accuracy Port1 5.2.1.6 0.010 GHz –12.0 ___________ –8.0 0.23 0.100 GHz –12.0 ___________ –8.0 0.18 0.150 GHz –11.0 ___________ –9.0...
Page 912 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dBm max. tainty / dB to section value/dBm value/dBm Level accuracy Port2 5.2.1.6 0.010 GHz –12.0 ___________ –8.0 0.23 0.100 GHz –12.0 ___________ –8.0 0.18 0.150 GHz –11.0 ___________ –9.0...
Page 913 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Level linearity Port1 5.2.1.7 Reference: –10 dBm Without option ZVK-B21: f = 0.010 GHz 10 dB ___________ 11.0 0.051 5 dB...
Page 914 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Level linearity Port1 5.2.1.7 Reference: –10 dBm Without option ZVK-B21: f = 10.200 GHz 10 dB ___________ 10.4 0.051 5 dB...
Page 915 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Level linearity Port1 5.2.1.7 Reference: –10 dBm Without option ZVK-B21: f = 0.010 GHz 7 dB ___________ 0.051 5 dB ___________...
Page 916 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Level linearity Port1 5.2.1.7 Reference: –10 dBm With option ZVK-B21: f = 10.200 GHz 7 dB ___________ 0.051 5 dB ___________...
Page 917 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Level linearity Port2 5.2.1.7 Reference: –10 dBm Without option ZVK-B22: f = 0.010 GHz 10 dB ___________ 11.0 0.051 5 dB...
Page 918 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Level linearity Port2 5.2.1.7 Reference: –10 dBm Without option ZVK-B22: f = 10.200 GHz 10 dB ___________ 10.4 0.051 5 dB...
Page 919 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Level linearity Port2 5.2.1.7 Reference: –10 dBm With option ZVK-B22: f = 0.010 GHz 7 dB ___________ 0.051 5 dB ___________...
Page 920 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Level linearity Port2 5.2.1.7 Reference: –10 dBm With option ZVK-B22: f = 10.200 GHz 7 dB ___________ 0.051 5 dB ___________...
Page 921 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Absolute accuracy PORT1 5.2.2.1 Input level –10 dBm Difference from -10 dBm: –2.0 ____________ 0.70 0.010 GHz –2.0 ____________ 0.70...
Page 922 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Absolute accuracy PORT2 5.2.2.1 Input level –10 dBm Difference from -10 dBm: –2.0 ____________ 0.70 0.010 GHz –2.0 ____________ 0.70...
Page 923 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Absolute accuracy INPUT B1 5.2.2.1 With receiver step at- tenuator ZVK-B23 in- stalled Input level –10 dBm Difference from –10 dBm: –2.0...
Page 924 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Absolute accuracy INPUT B2 5.2.2.1 With receiver step at- tenuator ZVK-B24 in- stalled Input level –10 dBm Difference from –10 dBm: –2.0...
Page 925 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Linearity B1 5.2.2.2 Reference: –10 dBm Without opt. ZVK-B22 f = 0.010 GHz 10 dB -0.2 ___________ 0.058 5 dB -0.2...
Page 926 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Linearity B1 5.2.2.2 Reference: –10 dBm Without opt. ZVK-B22 f = 16.00 GHz 10 dB -0.2 ___________ 0.058 5 dB -0.2...
Page 927 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Linearity B1 5.2.2.2 Reference: –10 dBm With option ZVK-B22 f = 0.010 GHz 7 dB -0.2 ___________ 0.058 5 dB -0.2...
Page 928 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Linearity B1 5.2.2.2 Reference: –10 dBm with option ZVK-B22 f = 16.00 GHz 7 dB -0.2 ___________ 0.058 5 dB -0.2...
Page 929 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/° value/° max. value/° tainty / ° to section Linearity B1 5.2.2.2 Reference: –10 dBm Without opt. ZVK-B22 f = 0.010 GHz 10 dB ___________ 0.58 5 dB ___________ 0.58...
Page 930 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/° value/° max. value/° tainty / ° to section Linearity B1 5.2.2.2 Reference: –10 dBm Without opt. ZVK-B22 f = 16.00 GHz 10 dB ___________ 0.58 5 dB ___________ 0.58...
Page 931 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/° value/° max. value/° tainty / ° to section Linearity B1 5.2.2.2 Reference: –10 dBm With option ZVK-B22 f = 0.010 GHz 7 dB ___________ 0.58 5 dB ___________ 0.58...
Page 932 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/° value/° max. value/° tainty / ° to section Linearity B1 5.2.2.2 Reference: –10 dBm With option ZVK-B22 f = 16.00 GHz 7 dB ___________ 0.58 5 dB ___________ 0.58...
Page 933 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Linearity B2 5.2.2.2 Reference: –10 dBm Without opt. ZVK-B21 f = 0.010 GHz 10 dB -0.2 ___________ 0.058 5 dB -0.2...
Page 934 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Linearity B2 5.2.2.2 Reference: –10 dBm Without opt. ZVK-B21 f = 16.00 GHz 10 dB -0.2 ___________ 0.058 5 dB -0.2...
Page 935 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Linearity B2 5.2.2.2 Reference: –10 dBm With opt. ZVK-B21 f = 0.010 GHz 7 dB -0.2 ___________ 0.058 5 dB -0.2...
Page 936 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Linearity B2 5.2.2.2 Reference: –10 dBm With option ZVK-B21 f = 16.00 GHz 7 dB -0.2 ___________ 0.058 5 dB -0.2...
Page 937 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/° value/° max. value/° tainty / ° to section Linearity B2 5.2.2.2 Reference: –10 dBm Without option ZVK- f = 0.010 GHz ___________ 0.58 10 dB ___________ 0.58 5 dB...
Page 938 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/° value/° max. value/° tainty / ° to section Linearity B2 5.2.2.2 Reference: –10 dBm Without opt. ZVK-B21 f = 16.00 GHz 10 dB ___________ 0.58 5 dB ___________ 0.58...
Page 939 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/° value/° max. value/° tainty / ° to section Linearity B2 5.2.2.2 Reference: –10 dBm With option ZVK-B21 f = 0.010 GHz 7 dB ___________ 0.58 5 dB ___________ 0.58...
Page 940 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/° value/° max. value/° tainty / ° to section Linearity B2 5.2.2.2 Reference: –10 dBm With option ZVK-B21 f = 16.00 GHz 7 dB ___________ 0.58 5 dB ___________ 0.58...
Page 941 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dBm Noise level PORT1 5.2.2.3 IF BW 10 Hz: 0.010 GHz ____________ -70.0 0.100 GHz ____________ -70.0 0.150 GHz ____________ -70.0 0.500 GHz...
Page 942 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dBm Noise level PORT2 5.2.2.3 IF BW 10 Hz: 0.010 GHz ____________ -70.0 0.100 GHz ____________ -70.0 0.150 GHz ____________ -70.0 0.500 GHz...
Page 943 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Match INPUT B1 5.2.2.4 With ZVK-B23 installed 0.050 GHz ____________ 0.100 GHz ____________ 0.150 GHz ____________ 0.500 GHz ____________ 1.000 GHz ____________...
Page 944 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Match INPUT B2 5.2.2.4 With ZVK-B24 installed 0.050 GHz ____________ 0.100 GHz ____________ 0.150 GHz ____________ 0.500 GHz ____________ 1.000 GHz ____________...
Page 945 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Match PORT1 5.2.3.1 0.010 GHz 10.0 ____________ 0.050 GHz 12.0 ____________ 0.100 GHz 12.0 ____________ 0.150 GHz 12.0 ____________ 0.500 GHz...
Page 946 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Match PORT2 5.2.3.1 0.010 GHz 10.0 ____________ 0.050 GHz 12.0 ____________ 0.100 GHz 12.0 ____________ 0.150 GHz 12.0 ____________ 0.500 GHz...
Page 947 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Match R1 CHANNEL IN 5.2.3.2 0.010 GHz 0.050 GHz ____________ 0.100 GHz ____________ 0.150 GHz ____________ 0.500 GHz ____________ 1.000 GHz ____________...
Page 948 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Match R2 CHANNEL IN 5.2.3.2 0.010 GHz 0.050 GHz ____________ 0.100 GHz ____________ 0.150 GHz ____________ 0.500 GHz ____________ 1.000 GHz ____________...
Page 949 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Raw directivity PORT1 5.2.3.3 0.010 GHz ____________ 0.100 GHz ____________ 0.150 GHz ____________ 0.500 GHz ____________ 1.000 GHz ____________ 1.500 GHz ____________...
Page 950 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Raw directivity PORT2 5.2.3.3 0.010 GHz ____________ 0.100 GHz ____________ 0.150 GHz ____________ 0.500 GHz ____________ 1.000 GHz ____________ 1.500 GHz ____________...
Page 951 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Generator step attenu- 5.2.3.4 ator A1 With ZVK-B21 installed f = 1.0 GHz, reference value 10 dB 0 dB -3.0 ____________...
Page 952 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Generator step attenu- 5.2.3.4 ator A2 with ZVK-B22 installed f = 1.0 GHz, reference value 10 dB 0 dB -3.0 ____________...
Page 953 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Receiver step attenu- 5.2.3.4 ator B1 With ZVK-B23 installed f = 1.0 GHz, reference value 10 dB 0 dB -3.0 ____________...
Page 954 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Receiver step attenu- 5.2.3.4 ator B2 With ZVK-B24 installed f = 1.0 GHz, reference value 10 dB 0 dB -3.0 ____________...
Page 955 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Dynamic range PORT 1 5.2.3.5 IF BW 10 Hz: 0.010 GHz 70.0 ____________ 0.100 GHz 70.0 ____________ 0.500 GHz 110.0 ____________...
Page 956 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Dynamic range PORT 1 5.2.3.5 IF BW 10 kHz: 0.010 GHz 40.0 ____________ 0.100 GHz 40.0 ____________ 0.500 GHz 80.0 ____________...
Page 957 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Dynamic range PORT 2 5.2.3.5 IF BW 10 Hz: 0.010 GHz 70.0 ____________ 0.100 GHz 70.0 ____________ 0.500 GHz 110.0 ____________...
Page 958 Performance Test Record (ZVK) Item Characteristic Measure- Specification Measured Specification Uncer- ment acc. min. value/dB value/dB max. tainty / dB to section value/dB Dynamic range PORT 2 5.2.3.5 IF BW 10 kHz: 0.010 GHz 40.0 ____________ 0.100 GHz 40.0 ____________ 0.500 GHz 80.0 ____________...
Page 960 Interfaces Annex A - Interfaces IEC Bus Interface (SCPI IEC625, SYSTEM BUS) The standard network analyzer is equipped with twp IEC/IEEE bus connectors. The IEEE 488 interface connector is located on the rear panel of the instrument. An external controller for remote control of the networkanalyzer can be connected via the IEEE 488 interface connector using a shielded cable.
Page 961 Interfaces Bus Lines 1. Data bus with 8 lines DIO 1 to DIO 8. The transmission is bit-parallel and byte-serial in the ASCII/ISO code. DIO1 is the least significant, DIO8 the most significant bit. 2. Control bus with 5 lines. IFC (Interface Clear), active low resets the interfaces of the devices connected to the default setting.
Page 962 Interfaces Interface Functions Instruments which can be remote controlled via the IEC bus can be equipped with different interface functions. Table A-1 lists the interface functions appropriate for the instrument. Table A-1 Interface functions Control character Interface function Handshake source function (source handshake), full capability Handshake sink function (acceptor handshake), full capability Listener function, full capability, deaddressed by MTA.
Page 963 Interfaces Universal Commands The universal commands are encoded 10 - 1F hex. They affect all instruments connected to the bus without addressing. Table A-2 Universal Commands Command QuickBASIC command Effect on the instrument (Device Clear) IBCMD (controller%, CHR$(20)) Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state.
Page 964 Interfaces RS-232-C Interface (COM1, COM2) The standard instrument is equipped with two serial interfaces (RS-232-C). The RS-232-C interfaces are two independent, remote-control channels, both of which may be active at the same time. The programming and interrogation commands affect the same instrument hardware. The interfaces can be set up manually in the SETUP-GENERAL SETUP menu in the COM PORT1/2 table or, via remote control, switched on/off with the command SYSTem:COMMunication:SERial1|2:STATe.
Page 965 Interfaces 2. Control lines DCD (Data Carrier Detect), Not used in this instrument. Input; active LOW. Using this signal, the local terminal recognises that the modem of the remote station receives valid signals with sufficient level. DCD is used to disable the receiver in the local terminal and prevent reading of false data if the modem cannot interpret the signals of the remote station.
Page 966 Interfaces Interface Functions For interface control, several strings are defined and control characters are reserved which are based upon IEC Bus control. Table A-4 Control strings or control characters of the RS-232 interface Control string or character Function "@REM" Switch over to remote "@LOC"...
Page 967 Interfaces Hardware handshake For hardware handshake, the instrument indicates that it is ready to receive data via the lines DTR and RTS. A logic ’0’ on both lines means "ready" and a logic ’1’ means "not ready". The RTS line is always active (logic ’0’) as long as the serial interface is switched on.
Page 968 Interfaces RSIB Interface The instrument is equipped with an RSIB interface as standard, which enables controlling of the instrument by means of Visual C++ and Visual Basic programs. The control applications run on an external computer in the network. A Unix operating system can be installed on an external computer in addition to a Windows operating system.
Page 969 Interfaces The RSIB directory also contains the program RSIBCNTR.EXE with which SCPI commands can be sent to the instrument via the RSIB interface. This program can be used to test the function of the interface. Required for the test is delay module VBRUN300.DLL in the path or in the Windows directory. The control is performed with Visual C++ or Visual Basic programs.
Page 970 Interfaces RSIB Interface Functions This chapter lists all functions of the DLL "RSIB.DLL" or "RSIB32.DLL" or "librsib.so", which allow to produce control applications. Variables ibsta, iberr, ibcntl Same as with the National Instruments interface, successful execution of a command can be checked by means of the variables ibsta, iberr and ibcntl.
Page 971 Interfaces Count variable - ibcntl The variable ibcntl is updated with the number of bytes transmitted on every read and write function call. Overview of Interface Functions The library functions are adapted to the interface functions of National Instruments for GPIB programming.
Page 972 Interfaces Description of Interface Functions RSDLLibfind() The function provides a handle for access to the device with the name udName. VB format: Function RSDLLibfind (ByVal udName$, ibsta%, iberr%, ibcntl&) As Integer C-format: short WINAPI RSDLLibfind( char far *udName, short far *ibsta, short far *iberr, unsigned long far *ibcntl) C format (Unix): short RSDLLibfind( char *udName, short *ibsta, short *iberr, unsigned long *ibcntl)
Page 973 Interfaces RSDLLilwrt This function sends Cnt bytes to a device with the handle ud. VB format: Function RSDLLilwrt (ByVal ud%, ByVal Wrt$, ByVal Cnt&, ibsta%, iberr%, ibcntl&) As Integer C format: short WINAPI RSDLLilwrt( short ud, char far *Wrt, unsigned long Cnt, short far *ibsta, short far *iberr, unsigned long far *ibcntl) C format (Unix): short RSDLLilwrt( short ud, char *Wrt, unsigned long Cnt, short *ibsta, short *iberr, unsigned long *ibcntl)
Page 974 Interfaces RSDLLibrd() The function reads data from the device with the handle ud into the string Rd. VB format: Function RSDLLibrd (ByVal ud%, ByVal Rd$, ibsta%, iberr%, ibcntl&) As Integer C format: short WINAPI RSDLLibrd( short ud, char far *Rd, short far *ibsta, short far *iberr, unsigned long far *ibcntl ) C format (Unix): short RSDLLibrd( short ud, char *Rd, short *ibsta, short *iberr, unsigned long *ibcntl )
Page 975 Interfaces RSDLLibrdf() Reads data from the device with the handle ud into the file file. VB format: Function RSDLLibrdf (ByVal ud%, ByVal file$, ibsta%, iberr%, ibcntl&) As Integer C format: short WINAPI RSDLLibrd( short ud, char far *file, short far *ibsta, short far *iberr, unsigned long far *ibcntl ) C format (Unix): short RSDLLibrd( short ud, char *file, short *ibsta, short *iberr, unsigned long *ibcntl )
Page 976 Interfaces RSDLLibsre This function sets the device to the ’LOCAL’ or ’REMOTE’ state. VB format: Function RSDLLibsre (ByVal ud%, ByVal v%, ibsta%, iberr%, ibcntl&) As Integer C format: short WINAPI RSDLLibsre( short ud, short v, short far *ibsta, short far *iberr, unsigned long far *ibcntl) C format (Unix): short RSDLLibsre( short ud, short v, short *ibsta, short *iberr, unsigned long *ibcntl) Parameter:...
Page 977 Interfaces RSDLLibrsp This function performs a serial poll and provides the status byte of the device. VB format: Function RSDLLibrsp(ByVal ud%, spr%, ibsta%, iberr%, ibcntl&) As Integer C format: short WINAPI RSDLLibrsp( short ud, char far* spr, short far *ibsta, short far *iberr, unsigned long far *ibcntl) C format (Unix): short RSDLLibrsp( short ud, char *spr, short *ibsta, short *iberr, unsigned long *ibcntl) Parameter:...
Page 978 Interfaces RSDLLTestSRQ This function checks the status of the SRQ bit. VB format: Function RSDLLTestSrq (ByVal ud%, Result%, ibsta%, iberr%, ibcntl&) As Integer C format: short WINAPI RSDLLTestSrq( short ud, short far *result, short far *ibsta, short far *iberr, unsigned long far *ibcntl) C format (Unix): short RSDLLTestSrq( short ud, short *result, short *ibsta, short *iberr, unsigned long *ibcntl) Parameter:...
Page 979 Interfaces RSDLLSwapBytes This function changes the display of binary numbers on non-Intel platforms. VB format: Not provided at present since it is required only on non-Intel platforms. C format: void WINAPI RSDLLSwapBytes( void far *pArray, const long size, const long count) C format (Unix): void RSDLLSwapBytes( void *pArray, const long size, const long count) Parameter:...
Page 980 Interfaces User Interface (USER) The user interface, located on the rear panel of the ZVx, is a 25 pin Cannon connector which provides access to the two user ports (Port A and Port B). Each port is 8 bits wide (A0 - A7 and B0 -B7) and can be configured either as output or as input.
Page 981 Interfaces Printer Interface (LPT) The 25-pin LPT connector on the rear panel of the ZVx is provided for the connection of a printer. The LPT interface is compatible with the CENTRONICS printer interface. STROBE SELECT BUSY INIT AUTOFEED ERROR SELECT IN Signal Input (I) Description...
Page 982 Interfaces Probe Connectors (PROBE 1, PROBE 2) To allow the connection of probes, the ZVx has the supply voltage connectors PROBE 1 and PROBE 2. They deliver the power supply voltages +15 V, -12 V and ground. The connectors are also suited for powering the high-impedance probes from Hewlett Packard. Reference Input (REF IN) A high-precision external reference oscillator, used to increase the frequency accuracy and to improve the stability of the internal reference, can be connected here.
Page 983 Interfaces A.12 Connectors for Controlling an External Generator of the R&S Family SME / SMP and other (BLANK, TRIGGER) A special feature for of the signal generators of the Rohde & Schwarz SME and SMP families is the so- called "list mode" which serves to accelerate the sweep in the case of external control. In this mode a list containing a series of frequency points with the corresponding level is transmitted to the generator, e.g.
Page 984 Interfaces A.15 Mouse Connector (MOUSE) Signal MOUSEDATA MOUSEGND MOUSEVD5 MOUSECLK Fig A-8 Pin assignments for the MOUSE connector. A.16 Monitor Connectors (PC MONITOR, ANALYZER MONITOR) Signal MID2 R-GND G-GND B-GND MID0 MID1 HSYNC VSYNC Fig. A-9 Pin assignments of the MONITOR connector. 1043.0009.50 A.25...
Page 986 List of Error Messages Annex B – List of Error Messages The following list contains all error messages for errors occurring in the instrument. The meaning of negative error codes is defined in SCPI, positive error codes mark errors specific of the instrument. The table contains the error code in the left-hand column.
Page 987 List of Error Messages Continuation: Command Error Error code Error text in the case of queue poll Error explanation Missing parameter -109 The command contains too few parameters. Example: The command SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer requires a frequency indication. Command header error -110 The header of the command is faulty.
Page 988 List of Error Messages Continuation: Command Error Error text in the case of queue poll Error code Error explanation Character data too long -144 The text parameter contains more than 12 characters. Character data not allowed -148 The text parameter is not allowed for this command or at this position of the command. Example: The command *RCL requires a number to be indicated.
Page 989 List of Error Messages Execution Error - Error on execution of a command; sets bit 4 in the ESR register Error code Error text in the case of queue poll Error explanation Execution error -200 Error on execution of the command. Invalid while in local -201 The command is not executable while the device is in local due to a hard local control.
Page 990 List of Error Messages Continuation: Execution Error Error code Error text in the case of queue poll Error explanation Data corrupt or stale -230 The data are incomplete or invalid. Example: The instrument has aborted a measurement. Data questionable -231 The measurement accuracy is suspect.
Page 991 List of Error Messages Continuation: Execution Error Error code Error text in the case of queue poll Error explanation Macro error -270 Error on the execution of a macro. Macro syntax error -271 The macro definition contains a syntax error. Macro execution error -272 The macro definition contains an error.
Page 992 List of Error Messages Device Specific Error; sets bit 3 in the ESR register Error code Error test in the case of queue poll Error explanation Device-specific error -300 FSE-specific error not defined in greater detail. System error -310 This error message suggests an error within the instrument. Please inform the R&S Service. Memory error -311 Error in the instrument memory.
Page 994 List of Commands Annex C – List of Commands Command Parameters Page CALCulate[1...4]: FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STARt <numeric_value> 3.20 CALCulate[1...4]: FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STATe <Boolean> 3.20 <numeric_value> 3.21 CALCulate[1...4]:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:CENTer <numeric_value> 3.21 CALCulate[1...4]:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:DCHebyshev CALCulate[1...4]:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:SPAN <numeric_value> 3.21 CALCulate[1...4]:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STOP <numeric_value> 3.20 CALCulate[1...4]:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:WINDow RECT | HAMMing | HANNing | BOHMan | 3.21 DCHebyshev CALCulate[1...4]:FORMat...
Page 995 List of Commands Command Parameters Page CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:DELTa:REFerence: <numeric_value>,<numeric_value>,<numeric_value> 3.35 RPOSition:POLar CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:DELTa:STATe ON | OFF 3.35 CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:PTPeak:RESult? 3.36 CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:QFACtor 3.34 CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:REFerence – 3.37 CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:RESULT? 3.34 CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:EDELay TIME | DISTance | ELENgth | OFF 3.34 CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:EDELay:VALue? 3.35 CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:SFACtor <numeric_value>,<numeric_value> 3.34 CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:STARt – 3.36 CALCulate[1...4]:MARKer[1...8]:FUNCtion:STOP –...
Page 996 List of Commands Command Parameters Page TIME | DISTance | HDIStance 3.42 CALCulate[1...4]:TRANSform:TIME:XAXis CALCulate[1...4]:TRANsform:TIME[:TYPE] BPASs | LPASs 3.41 CALCulate[1...4]:UNIT:POWer:A1|A2|B1|B2 MW | W | UV | MV | V | DBM | DBW | DBUV | DBMV | 3.43 DIAGnostic:SERVice:FUNCtion <numeric_value>,<numeric_value>... 3.44 DIAGnostic:SERVice:RFPower ON | OFF...
Page 997 List of Commands Command Parameters Page HCOPy:ITEM:PFEed[1|2]:STATe ON | OFF 3.58 HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow[1...4]:TRACe[1|2]:LTYPe SOLid | STYLe<n> 3.59 HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow[1...4]:TRACe[1|2]:LTYPe:AINCrement ON | OFF 3.60 HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow[1...4]:TRACe[1|2]:LTYPe:STATe ON | OFF 3.59 HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TABLe:STATe ON | OFF 3.58 HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TEXT <string> 3.59 HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TRACe:CAINcrement ON | OFF 3.59 HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TRACe:STATe ON | OFF 3.59 HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:FULL...
Page 998 List of Commands Command Parameters Page MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings ON|OFF 3.69 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes[:ALL] ON|OFF 3.69 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:MACRos ON|OFF 3.70 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:MTRace<1...8> ON|OFF 3.69 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE 3.71 MMEMory:STORe:STATe 1, path 3.68 OUTPut:DPORt PORT1 | PORT2 3.72 OUTPut[1|2]:POWer NORMal | HIGH 3.72 OUTPut:RMIXer ON | OFF 3.72 OUTPut:UPORt<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF 3.73 OUTPut:UPORt<1|2>[:VALue]...
Page 999 List of Commands Command Parameters Page [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:CKIT:PC[7|35] MMTHrough | MFTHrough | FFTHrough | MMLINE1 | 3.96 FLINE1 | FFLINE1 | MMLINE2 | MFLINE2 | FFLINE2 | MMATten | MFATten | FFATten | MMSNetwork | MFSNetwork | FFSNetwork | MOPEn | FOPEn | MSHort | FSHort | MREFlect | FREFlect | MMATch | FMATch | MSMatch | FSMatch[,<string>] [SENSe[1...4]:]CORRection:CKIT:SMA...
Page 1000 List of Commands Command Parameters Page [SENSe[1...4]:]FREQuency:NLINear:COMP:STIMe <numeric_value> 3.106 [SENSe[1...4]:]FREQuency:NLINear:SOI:STIMe <numeric_value> 3.106 [SENSe[1...4]:]FREQuency:NLINear:TOI:STIMe <numeric_value> 3.106 [SENSe[1...4]:]FREQuency:SPAN <numeric_value> 3.103 [SENSe[1...4]:]FREQuency:STARt <numeric_value> 3.103 [SENSe[1...4]:]FREQuency:STOP <numeric_value> 3.103 [SENSe[1...4]:]FUNCtion[:ON] <string> 3.107 [SENSe[1...4]:]SEGMent: CLEar 3.111 [SENSe[1...4]:]SEGMent:COUNt? 3.111 [SENSe[1...4]:]SEGMent:DEFine[1...50] <numeric_value>,<numeric_value>,<numeric_value> 3.110 ,<numeric_value>,<numeric_value> | AUTO,<numeric_value>,<numeric_value>,<numeric_ value> [SENSe[1...4]:]SEGMent:DELete [1...50] 3.111 [SENSe[1...4]:]SEGMent:INSert [1...50] <numeric_value>,<numeric_value>,<numeric_value>...
Page 1001 List of Commands Command Parameters Page SOURce<1...4>:POWer:CORRection:LLISt <numeric_value>,<numeric_value>,<numeric_value> 3.120 SOURce<1...4>:POWer:CORRection:LLISt:STATe ON | OFF 3.121 SOURce<1...4>:POWer:CORRection:NREadings <numeric_value>. 3.120 SOURce<1...4>:POWer:CORRection[:ACQuire] A1 | A2 | ESRC1 | ESRC2 3.120 SOURce<1...4>:POWer:STARt <numeric_value> 3.119 SOURce<1...4>:POWer:STOP <numeric_value> 3.119 SOURce<1...4>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:CAMPlitude:A<1|2 <numeric_value> 3.116 > SOURce<1...4>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:CAMPlitude:ESR <numeric_value> 3.116 C<1|2> SOURce<1...4>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:EXTernal<1|2>:A <numeric_value>...
Page 1002 List of Commands Command Parameters Page SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RDEVice:PMETer:ADDRess 0...30 3.132 SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RDEVice<1|2>:ADDRess 0...30 3.131 SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess 0...30 3.131 SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:RTERminator LFEOI | EOI 3.131 SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter<1|2>:ENUMerate:FIRSt? 3.132 SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter<1|2>:ENUMerate:NEXT? 3.132 SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter<1|2>:SELect <printer_name> <printer_name> 3.133 SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<1|2>:CONTrol REMote | LOCal 3.133 SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<1|2>:LINK GPIB | TTL 3.133 SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<1|2>:TYPE HP8340A | HP_ESG | HP_ESG_B | SME02 | 3.134 SME03 | SME06 | SMG | SMGL | SMGU | SMH | SMHU | SMIQ02 | SMIQ02E | SMIQ03 | SMIQ03E |...
Page 1003 List of Commands Command Parameters Page TRACe[:DATA]:STIMulus:BODY? CH1DATA | CH2DATA | CH3DATA |CH4DATA | 3.142 CH1MEM | CH2MEM | CH3MEM | CH4MEM | MDATA1 | MDATA2 | MDATA3 | MDATA4 | MDATA5 | MDATA6 | MDATA7 | MDATA8 TRACe[:DATA]:STIMulus:PREamble? CH1DATA | CH2DATA | CH3DATA |CH4DATA | 3.142 CH1MEM | CH2MEM | CH3MEM | CH4MEM | MDATA1 | MDATA2 | MDATA3 | MDATA4 | MDATA5...
Page 1004 Programming Examples Annex D – Programming Examples The following examples explain the programming of the instrument and can serve as a basis to solve more complex programming tasks. QuickBASIC has been used as programming language. However, the programs can be translated into other languages.
Page 1005 Programming Examples Transmission of Instrument Setting Commands Center frequency, span, and reference level of the analyzer are set in this example. REM -------- Instrument setting commands ------------- CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "FREQUENCY:CENTER 120MHz") ’Center frequency 120 MHz CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "FREQUENCY:SPAN 10MHZ") ’Span 10 MHz CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "DISPLAY:TRACE:Y:SPACING LINear") ’Linear scaling REM ***********************************************************************...
Page 1006 Programming Examples Command synchronization The possibilities for synchronization implemented in the following example are described in Section 3.7.6, Command Order and Command Synchronization. REM -------- Examples of command synchronization --------- REM The command INITiate[:IMMediate] starts a single sweep if the command REM INIT:CONT OFF was previously sent.
Page 1007 Programming Examples Service Request The service request routine requires an extended initialization of the instrument in which the respective bits of the transition and enable registers are set. In order to use the service request function in conjugation with National Instruments GPIB driver, the setting "Disable Auto Serial Poll"...
Page 1008 Programming Examples Reading out the status event registers, the output buffer and the error/event queue is effected in subroutines. REM -------- Subroutines for the individual STB bits ------ Outputqueue: ’Reading the output buffer Message$ = SPACE$(100) ’Make space for response CALL IBRD(analyzer%, Message$) PRINT "Message in output buffer :";...
Page 1009 Programming Examples Programming via the RSIB Interface The following hints apply to both the 16-bit and the 32-bit DLL versions (RSIB.DLL and RSIB32.DLL) unless an explicit distinction is made. The RSIB interface supports links to max. 16 measuring instruments at the same time. D.9.1 Visual Basic Programming hints:...
Page 1010 Programming Examples Example: Dim ibsta As Integer ’ Status variable Dim iberr As Integer ’ Error variable Dim ibcntl As Long ’ Count variable Dim ud As Integer ’ Handle for measuring instrument Dim Result As String ’ Buffer for simple results Dim Digits As Byte ’...
Page 1011 Programming Examples • In this example, a Save/Recall of the instrument setups is performed. Dim ibsta As Integer ’ Status variable Dim iberr As Integer ’ Error variable Dim ibcntl As Long ’ Count variable Dim ud As Integer ’ Handle for measuring instrument Dim Cmd As String ’...
Page 1012 Programming Examples Programming example: • Using the macro QueryMaxPeak a single sweep with subsequent query of the maximum peak is performed. The result is entered in a Winword or Excel document. Sub QueryMaxPeak() Dim ibsta As Integer ’ Status variable Dim iberr As Integer ’...
Page 1013 Programming Examples D.9.3 C / C++ Programming hints: • Access to the functions of the RSIB32.DLL (Windows platforms) The functions of the RSIB32.DLL are declared in the header file RSIB.H. The DLL functions can be linked to a C/C++ program in different ways. 1.
Page 1014 Programming Examples Programming example: In the following C program example, a single sweep is started on the device with the IP address 89.10.38.97 and subsequently a marker is set to maximum level. Prior to the search for maximum, a synchronization to the end of the sweep is performed. For this purpose the command "*OPC" (Operation complete) is used to create a service request at the end of the sweep, for which the control program waits with the function RSDLLWaitSrq().
Page 1016 Mouse Control Annex E - Emulations Mouse Control of Display Elements The network analyzer can be optionally equipped with a mouse (see Chapter 1 "Connecting a Mouse"). All display and control elements (enhancement labels, softkeys, function fields, display and limit lines) which can be displayed on the display screen can also be controlled by the mouse.

This manual is also suitable for:

Zvm Zvrl Zvk Zvr Zvc Zvce

Save PDF